Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera ILCE-6500 α6500

Names of parts/Icons and indicators

Names of parts

Identifying parts [1]

Basic operations

Using the control wheel [2]

Using MENU items [3]
Using the Fn (Function) button [4]
How to use the Quick Navi screen [5]
Using the AF/MF/AEL switch lever [6]
How to use the keyboard [7]

Icons and indicators

List of icons on the screen [8]

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback) [9]
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder) [10]

Preparing the camera

Checking the camera and the supplied items [11]
Charging the battery pack

Inserting/removing the battery pack [12]

Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera [13]
Charging by connecting to a computer [14]
Battery life and number of recordable images [15]
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket) [16]
Notes on the battery pack [17]
 Notes on charging the battery pack [18]

Inserting a memory card (sold separately)

Inserting/removing a memory card [19]

Memory cards that can be used [20]
Notes on memory card [21]

Attaching a lens

Attaching/removing a lens [22]

Attaching the lens hood [23]

Attaching accessories

Mount Adaptor [24]

LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor [25]
LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor [26]

Setting language, date and time [27]

In-Camera Guide [28]

Shooting
Shooting still images [29]
Focusing

Focus Mode [30]

Auto focus

Focus Area [31]

Phase detection AF [32]
Focus Standard [33]
AF/MF control [34]
AF w/ shutter (still image) [35]
AF On [36]
 Eye AF [37]
AF in Focus Mag. (still image) [38]
Center Lock-on AF [39]
Pre-AF (still image) [40]
Eye-Start AF (still image) [41]
Priority Set in AF-S [42]
Priority Set in AF-C [43]
AF Illuminator (still image) [44]
AF Area Auto Clear [45]
Disp. cont. AF area [46]
AF Micro Adj. [47]
AF System (still image) [48]

Manual focus

Manual Focus [49]

Direct manual focus (DMF) [50]
Focus Magnifier [51]
MF Assist (still image) [52]
Focus Magnif. Time [53]
Peaking Level [54]
Peaking Color [55]

Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Drive Mode [56]

Cont. Shooting [57]
Self-timer [58]
Self-timer(Cont) [59]
Cont. Bracket [60]
Single Bracket [61]
Indicator during bracket shooting [62]
WB bracket [63]
DRO Bracket [64]
 Bracket Settings [65]

Using touch functions

Touch Operation [66]

Touch Focus [67]
Touch Pad Area Set. [68]
Touch Pad (vertical) [69]

Selecting still image size/image quality

Image Size (still image) [70]

Aspect Ratio (still image) [71]
Quality (still image) [72]
Panorama: Size [73]
Panorama: Direction [74]

Selecting a shooting mode

List of mode dial function [75]

Intelligent Auto [76]
Superior Auto [77]
S. Auto Img. Extract.
[78]
Switching the auto mode (Auto Mode) [79]
About Scene Recognition [80]
The advantages of automatic shooting [81]
Program Auto [82]
Aperture Priority [83]
Shutter Priority [84]
Manual Exposure [85]
Bulb shooting [86]
Sweep Panorama
[87]
Scene Selection [88]
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2) [89]
Movie/S&Q Motion [90]
Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Exposure Comp. [91]

Dial/Wheel Ev Comp [92]
Exposure Set. Guide [93]
Exposure step [94]
Metering Mode [95]
Spot Metering Point [96]
AE lock [97]
AEL w/ shutter (still image) [98]
Exposure Std. Adjust [99]
Exp.comp.set [100]
Zebra [101]

Correcting brightness and contrast

D-Range Opt. (DRO) [102]

Auto HDR [103]

Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO [104]
ISO AUTO Min. SS [105]

Using the zoom

The zoom features available with this product [106]

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom) [107]
Zoom Setting [108]
About zoom scale [109]
Zoom Ring Rotate [110]

White balance

White Balance [111]

Priority Set in AWB [112]
 Capturing a basic white color in [Custom Setup] mode [113]

Selecting an effect mode

Creative Style [114]

Picture Effect [115]
Soft Skin Effect (still image) [116]
Auto Obj. Framing (still image) [117]
Color Space (still image) [118]

Shutter settings

Release w/o Lens [119]

Release w/o Card [120]
Silent Shooting (still image) [121]
e-Front Curtain Shut. [122]

Reducing blur

SteadyShot [123]
SteadyShot Settings [124]

Lens compensation

Lens Comp.: Shading Comp. [125]

Lens Comp.: Chro. Aber. Comp. [126]
Lens Comp.: Distortion Comp. [127]

Noise reduction

Long Exposure NR (still image) [128]

High ISO NR (still image) [129]

Face detection

Smile/Face Detect.
[130]
Face Registration (New Registration) [131]
Face Registration (Order Exchanging) [132]
 Face Registration (Delete) [133]

Using the flash

Using flash
[134]
Red Eye Reduction [135]
Flash Mode [136]
Flash Comp. [137]
FEL lock [138]
Wireless flash shooting [139]

Recording movies
Shooting movies [140]
Movie recording formats [141]
File Format (movie) [142]
Record Setting (movie) [143]
S&Q Settings [144]
Dual Video REC [145]
Audio Recording [146]
Audio Level Display [147]
Audio Rec Level [148]
Wind Noise Reduct. [149]
Picture Profile [150]
Gamma Disp. Assist [151]
Auto Slow Shut. (movie) [152]
AF drive speed (movie) [153]
AF Track Sens (movie) [154]
TC/UB Settings [155]
TC/UB Disp. Switch [156]
MOVIE Button [157]
Marker Display (movie) [158]
Marker Settings (movie) [159]
4K Output Sel. (movie) [160]

Viewing
Viewing images

Playing back still images [161]

Enlarging an image being played back (Playback zoom) [162]
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation) [163]
Rotating an image (Rotate) [164]
Playing back panoramic images [165]
Playing back movies [166]
Volume Settings [167]
Photo Capture [168]
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index) [169]
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode) [170]
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show) [171]

Protecting data

Protecting images (Protect) [172]

Designating images for printing (DPOF)

Specify Printing (Specify Printing) [173]

Deleting images

Deleting a displayed image [174]

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete) [175]
Delete confirm. [176]

Viewing images on a TV

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable [177]

Customizing the camera

Registering frequently used functions

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2) [178]

Assigning selected functions to the button

Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

[179]
Function Menu Set. [180]

Customizing the functions of the dial

Dial/Wheel Setup [181]

Dial / Wheel Lock
[182]

Checking images before/after recording

Auto Review [183]

Aperture Preview [184]
Shot. Result Preview [185]
Live View Display [186]

Monitor/viewfinder settings

Grid Line [187]

FINDER/MONITOR [188]
Deactivate Monitor [189]
Monitor Brightness [190]
Viewfinder Bright. [191]
Finder Color Temp. [192]
Finder Frame Rate (still image) [193]
Display Quality [194]
Bright Monitoring [195]

Memory card settings

 Format [196]
File Number [197]
Set File Name [198]
Display Media Info. [199]
Select REC Folder [200]
New Folder [201]
Folder Name [202]
Recover Image DB [203]
Upload Settings (Eye-Fi) [204]

Camera settings

Audio signals [205]

Tile Menu [206]
Mode Dial Guide [207]
Pwr Save Start Time [208]
Auto Pwr OFF Temp. [209]
Remote Ctrl [210]
NTSC/PAL Selector [211]
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution [212]
HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible models)
[213]
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display [214]
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie) [215]
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie) [216]
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI [217]
USB Connection [218]
USB LUN Setting [219]
USB Power Supply [220]
PC Remote Settings: Still Img. Save Dest. [221]
PC Remote Settings: RAW+J PC Save Img [222]
Language  [223]
Date/Time Setup [224]
Area Setting [225]
 Copyright Info [226]
Version [227]
Certification Logo (For some models only) [228]
Demo Mode [229]

Initializing the camera

Setting Reset [230]

Using wireless functions

Connecting this product and a Smartphone

PlayMemories Mobile [231]

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)
[232]
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR code) [233]
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID) [234]
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR code) [235]
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID) [236]

Transferring images to a Smartphone

Send to Smartphone [237]

Sending images to an Android smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing) [238]

Transferring images to a computer

Send to Computer [239]

Transferring images to a TV

View on TV [240]

Reading location information from a smartphone

Loc. Info. Link Set. [241]

Changing the wireless connection settings

Airplane Mode [242]

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push [243]
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set. [244]
Edit Device Name [245]
Wi-Fi Settings: Disp MAC Address [246]
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset [247]
Reset Network Set. [248]

PlayMemories Camera Apps

About PlayMemories Camera Apps

PlayMemories Camera Apps [249]

Recommended computer environment [250]

Installing the applications

Opening a service account [251]

Downloading applications [252]
Downloading applications directly to the product using the Wi-Fi function [253]

Starting the applications

Launching the downloaded application (Application List) [254]

Calling up an application using [One-touch(NFC)] [255]

Managing the applications

Uninstalling applications [256]

Changing the order of applications [257]
Confirming the account information of PlayMemories Camera Apps [258]

Using a computer
Recommended computer environment [259]
Software for Mac computers [260]
Importing images for use on a computer

PlayMemories Home [261]

Installing PlayMemories Home [262]
Connecting the camera to a computer [263]
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home [264]
Disconnecting the camera from the computer [265]

Developing RAW images (Image Data Converter)

Image Data Converter [266]

Installing Image Data Converter [267]

Controlling the camera from a computer (Remote Camera Control)

Remote Camera Control [268]

Installing Remote Camera Control [269]

Creating a movie disc

Selecting a disc to be created [270]

Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality movies [271]
Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality
movies [272]
Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies [273]

List of MENU items

Using MENU items [274]
Camera Settings1

Quality (still image) [275]

Image Size (still image) [276]
Aspect Ratio (still image) [277]
Panorama: Size [278]
Panorama: Direction [279]
Long Exposure NR (still image) [280]
High ISO NR (still image) [281]
Color Space (still image) [282]
Lens Comp.: Shading Comp. [283]
Lens Comp.: Chro. Aber. Comp. [284]
Lens Comp.: Distortion Comp. [285]
Switching the auto mode (Auto Mode) [286]
Scene Selection [287]
S. Auto Img. Extract.
[288]
Drive Mode [289]
Bracket Settings [290]
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2) [291]
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2) [292]
Focus Mode [293]
Priority Set in AF-S [294]
Priority Set in AF-C [295]
Focus Area [296]
AF Illuminator (still image) [297]
Center Lock-on AF [298]
AF System (still image) [299]
AF w/ shutter (still image) [300]
Pre-AF (still image) [301]
Eye-Start AF (still image) [302]
AF Area Auto Clear [303]
Disp. cont. AF area [304]
AF Micro Adj. [305]
Exposure Comp. [306]
ISO [307]
ISO AUTO Min. SS [308]
Metering Mode [309]
Spot Metering Point [310]
Exposure step [311]
 AEL w/ shutter (still image) [312]
Exposure Std. Adjust [313]
Flash Mode [314]
Flash Comp. [315]
Exp.comp.set [316]
Red Eye Reduction [317]
White Balance [318]
Priority Set in AWB [319]
D-Range Opt. (DRO) [320]
Auto HDR [321]
Creative Style [322]
Picture Effect [323]
Picture Profile [324]
Soft Skin Effect (still image) [325]
Focus Magnifier [326]
Focus Magnif. Time [327]
AF in Focus Mag. (still image) [328]
MF Assist (still image) [329]
Peaking Level [330]
Peaking Color [331]
Smile/Face Detect.
[332]
Face Registration (New Registration) [333]
Face Registration (Order Exchanging) [334]
Face Registration (Delete) [335]
Auto Obj. Framing (still image) [336]

Camera Settings2

Movie/S&Q Motion [337]

File Format (movie) [338]
Record Setting (movie) [339]
S&Q Settings [340]
Dual Video REC [341]
AF drive speed (movie) [342]
AF Track Sens (movie) [343]
Auto Slow Shut. (movie) [344]
Audio Recording [345]
Audio Rec Level [346]
Audio Level Display [347]
Wind Noise Reduct. [348]
Marker Display (movie) [349]
Marker Settings (movie) [350]
Silent Shooting (still image) [351]
e-Front Curtain Shut. [352]
Release w/o Lens [353]
Release w/o Card [354]
SteadyShot [355]
SteadyShot Settings [356]
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom) [357]
Zoom Setting [358]
Zoom Ring Rotate [359]
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder) [360]
FINDER/MONITOR [361]
Finder Frame Rate (still image) [362]
Zebra [363]
Grid Line [364]
Exposure Set. Guide [365]
Live View Display [366]
Auto Review [367]
Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)
[368]
Function Menu Set. [369]
Dial/Wheel Setup [370]
Dial/Wheel Ev Comp [371]
MOVIE Button [372]
Dial / Wheel Lock
[373]
Audio signals [374]
Wireless

Send to Smartphone [375]

Send to Computer [376]
View on TV [377]
Calling up an application using [One-touch(NFC)] [378]
Airplane Mode [379]
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push [380]
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set. [381]
Wi-Fi Settings: Disp MAC Address [382]
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset [383]
Bluetooth Settings [384]
Loc. Info. Link Set. [385]
Edit Device Name [386]
Reset Network Set. [387]

Application

Launching the downloaded application (Application List) [388]

Introduction [389]

Playback

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete) [390]

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode) [391]
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index) [392]
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation) [393]
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show) [394]
Rotating an image (Rotate) [395]
Enlarging an image being played back (Playback zoom) [396]
Protecting images (Protect) [397]
Specify Printing (Specify Printing) [398]
Photo Capture [399]
Setup

Monitor Brightness [400]

Viewfinder Bright. [401]
Finder Color Temp. [402]
Gamma Disp. Assist [403]
Volume Settings [404]
Upload Settings (Eye-Fi) [405]
Tile Menu [406]
Mode Dial Guide [407]
Delete confirm. [408]
Display Quality [409]
Pwr Save Start Time [410]
Auto Pwr OFF Temp. [411]
NTSC/PAL Selector [412]
Cleaning Mode [413]
Touch Operation [414]
Touch Pad Area Set. [415]
Demo Mode [416]
TC/UB Settings [417]
Remote Ctrl [418]
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution [419]
HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible models)
[420]
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display [421]
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie) [422]
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie) [423]
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI [424]
4K Output Sel. (movie) [425]
USB Connection [426]
USB LUN Setting [427]
USB Power Supply [428]
PC Remote Settings: Still Img. Save Dest. [429]
 PC Remote Settings: RAW+J PC Save Img [430]
Language  [431]
Date/Time Setup [432]
Area Setting [433]
Copyright Info [434]
Format [435]
File Number [436]
Set File Name [437]
Select REC Folder [438]
New Folder [439]
Folder Name [440]
Recover Image DB [441]
Display Media Info. [442]
Version [443]
Certification Logo (For some models only) [444]
Setting Reset [445]

Precautions/This product
Precautions [446]
On cleaning [447]
Cleaning the image sensor

Cleaning Mode [448]

Number of recordable images [449]

Recordable movie times [450]
Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad [451]
AVCHD format [452]
License [453]
Trademarks [454]

If you have problems

Troubleshooting [455]
Warning messages [456]

[1] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Names of parts

Identifying parts

When the lens is removed

1. Shutter button
2. Remote sensor
3. Wi-Fi antenna (built-in)
4. ON/OFF (Power) switch
5. Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator
6. Lens release button
7. Microphone*
8. Mount
9. Image sensor**
10. Lens contacts**
* Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.
** Do not touch this part directly.
1. Multi Interface Shoe*
Some accessories may not go in all the way and protrude backward from the Multi
interface shoe. However, when the accessory reaches the front end of the shoe, the
connection is completed.

2. Image sensor position mark

The image sensor is the sensor that converts light into an electric signal. The mark
shows the location of the image sensor. When you measure the exact distance between
the camera and the subject, refer to the position of the horizontal line.
The distance from the lens contact surface to the image sensor is about 18 mm (23/32
in.).

If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot
be confirmed. Make sure you put enough distance between the subject and the camera.

3. Hook for shoulder strap

Attach both ends of the strap onto the camera.
 4. Speaker
5. Flash
Press the (Flash pop-up) button to use the flash. The flash does not pop up
automatically.
When not using the flash, press it back into the camera body.

6. C2 button (Custom button 2)

7. C1 button (Custom button 1)
8. Mode dial
(Auto Mode) /P (Program Auto) / A (Aperture Priority) / S (Shutter Priority) / M
(Manual Exposure) / 1/2 (Memory recall)/ (Movie/S&Q Motion) / (Sweep
Panorama) / SCN (Scene Selection)

9. Control dial
You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.

10. Multi/Micro USB Terminal*

This terminal supports Micro USB-compatible devices.

11. Charge lamp

12. HDMI micro jack
13. (Microphone) jack

When an external microphone is connected, the internal microphone turns off

automatically. When the external microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the
microphone is supplied by the camera.

* For details on compatible accessories for the multi interface shoe and the Multi/Micro USB Terminal, visit the
Sony web site, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. You can also use accessories
that are compatible with the accessory shoe. Operations with other manufacturers’ accessories are not
guaranteed.
1. Eye sensor
2. Viewfinder
3. Eyepiece cup
Not attached to the camera at the factory. It is recommended that you attach the
eyepiece cup when you intend to use the viewfinder.

Attaching/removing the eyepiece cup

Match the eyepiece cup to the groove on the viewfinder and slide it into place.

To remove the eyepiece cup, grasp it on the left and right sides and lift it up.

Remove the eyepiece cup when you attach an accessory (sold separately) to the Multi
Interface Shoe.

4. Monitor (For touch operation: Touch panel/Touch pad)

You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.

You may not be able to adjust the monitor angle depending on the type of a tripod you
use. In such a case, release the tripod screw once to adjust the monitor angle.

5. Diopter-adjustment dial
 Adjust the diopter-adjustment dial according to your eyesight until the display appears
clearly in the viewfinder. If it is hard to operate the diopter-adjustment dial, remove the
eyepiece cup before operating the dial.

6. (Flash pop-up) button

7. MENU button
8. AF/MF/AEL switch lever
9. For shooting: AF/MF button/AEL button
For viewing: (Enlarge) button
10. MOVIE (Movie) button
11. For shooting: Fn (Function) button
For viewing: (Send to Smartphone) button

You can display the screen for [Send to Smartphone] by

pressing this button.

12. Control wheel

13. Center button
14. For shooting: C3 button (Custom button 3)
For viewing: (Delete) button
15. (Playback) button

1. (N mark)

This mark indicates the touch point for connecting the camera and an NFC-enabled
Smartphone.
 NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of the short-range wireless
communication technology.

2. Connection plate cover

Use this when using an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor (sold separately). Insert the connection
plate into the battery compartment, and then pass the cord through the connection plate
cover as shown below.

Make sure that the cord is not pinched when you close the cover.

3. Tripod socket hole

Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot
firmly secure the camera, and damage to the camera may occur.

4. Access lamp
5. Battery/memory card cover
6. Memory card slot
7. Battery lock lever
8. Battery insertion slot

[2] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Basic operations

Using the control wheel

 
 You can select setting items by turning or pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the
control wheel. Your selection is determined when you press the center of the control wheel.

The default settings for the top/bottom/left/right side and the center of the control wheel are as
follows.
Top side: DISP (Display Setting)
Bottom side: Exposure Comp./Image Index ( / )
Left side: Drive Mode ( / )
Right side: ISO
Center: Eye AF
You can also assign the desired functions to the bottom/left/right side and the center of the
control wheel.
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of
the control wheel or by turning the control wheel.

[3] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Basic operations

Using MENU items

You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and
operating method. You can also execute camera functions from the MENU.

1 Press the MENU button to display the menu items.

2 Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of
 the control wheel or by turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the
control wheel.

Select an icon at the top of the screen and press the left/right side of the control wheel
to move to another MENU item.

3 Select the desired setting value, and press the center to confirm your selection.

[4] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Basic operations

Using the Fn (Function) button

You can register frequently used functions to the Fn (Function) button and recall them while
shooting. Up to 12 frequently used functions can be registered to the Fn (Function) button.

1 Press the DISP button repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [For
viewfinder], and then press the Fn (Function) button.

2 Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control
wheel.
 3 Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel, and press the center of the
control wheel.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the desired function in step 2, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated
setting screen for the function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

[5] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Basic operations

How to use the Quick Navi screen

The Quick Navi screen is a function optimized for shooting with the viewfinder, that lets you
control settings directly.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] → [For viewfinder],

then select [Enter].

2 Press the DISP on the control wheel to set the screen mode to [For viewfinder].

3 Press the Fn button to switch to the Quick Navi screen.

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and
may differ from the actual displays.

Auto mode/Scene Selection mode

P/A/S/M/Sweep Panorama mode

4 Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control
wheel.

5 Turn the control wheel to select the desired setting.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the desired function in step 4, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated
setting screen for the function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

Note
Items that are gray on the Quick Navi screen are not adjustable.

When using [Creative Style] or [Picture Profile], some of the setup tasks can be accomplished only
on a designated screen.

[6] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Basic operations

Using the AF/MF/AEL switch lever

You can switch the function of the AF/MF/AEL button to AF/MF or AEL by changing the position
of the AF/MF/AEL switch lever.

When you move the AF/MF/AEL switch lever (A) to the AF/MF position and press the button
(B), the focusing mode temporarily switches between auto and manual (AF/MF control). When
you move the AF/MF/AEL switch lever to the AEL position and press the button, the exposure is
locked (AE lock).
[7] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Basic operations

How to use the keyboard

When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.

Move the cursor on desired key using the control wheel, then press the center to enter.

1. Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
2. Switch character types
Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters,
numerals and symbols.
3. Keyboard
Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed
one-by-one in order.
For example: If you want to enter “abd”
Press the key for “abc” once to display “a” → select “ ”((5) Move cursor) and press the
key for “abc” twice to display “b” → press the key for “def” once to display “d.”

4. Finalize
Finalizes the entered characters.
5. Move cursor
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.
6. Delete
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
7.
Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.
8.
Enters a space.
To cancel input, select [Cancel].

[8] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Icons and indicators

List of icons on the screen

The displayed contents and their positions shown below are just a guideline, and may differ
from the actual display.

Monitor mode

Viewfinder mode

In Auto Mode or Scene Selection mode

P/A/S/M/Sweep Panorama mode

For playback

Basic information display

Histogram display

1. P P* A S M
Shoot Mode

Memory recall

Scene Recognition icons

Scene Selection
NO CARD
Memory card status/Uploading status
100
Remaining number of recordable images

Aspect ratio of still images

24M / 20M / 12M / 10M / 6.0M / 5.1M

Image size of still images

Image quality of still images

Frame rate of movies

Record setting of movies

Bluetooth connection available/Bluetooth connection unavailable

100%
Remaining battery

Remaining battery warning

USB power supply

Flash charge in progress

AF Illuminator

Setting Effect OFF 

NFC is activated

Airplane Mode

No audio recording of movies

Wind Noise Reduct.

SteadyShot Off/On, Camera shake warning

SteadyS. Focal Len. /Camera shake warning

Obtaining location information/Location information cannot be obtained

Overheating warning

Database file full/Database file error

Smart Zoom/ Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

View Mode 
100-0003
Folder number-File number

Protect

File format of movies

DPOF
DPOF set
 Dual Video REC

PC Remote

Silent Shooting

Bright Monitoring

Copyright information writing on

Gamma Disp. Assist

Auto object framing image

120fps 60fps 30fps 15fps 8fps 4fps 100fps 50fps 25fps 12fps 6fps 3fps 2fps 1fps
Frame rate for slow/quick motion shooting

Writing data/Number of images left to write

Focus Cancel

Lock-on AF OFF
Spot Focus
Performing Spot Focus
2.
Drive Mode

Flash Mode/Red Eye Reduction

±0.0
Flash Comp. 

Focus Mode

Focus Area

Metering Mode
35mm
Lens focal length
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)

D-Range Optimizer/Auto HDR

+3 +3 +3
Creative Style/Contrast, saturation, and sharpness
 Picture Effect

Smile detection sensitivity indicator

Picture Profile

Copyright information exists for image

Silent Shooting

Finder Frame Rate

3. Lock-on AF
Guide display for Center button Lock-on AF
Select Focus Point On/Off
Guide display for setting Focus Area
Focus Cancel
Guide display for setting Focus Cancel

Bracket indicator

Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

STBY
Movie recording standby
REC 1:00:12
Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)

Control wheel function

Control dial function

Focus
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture Value
ISO400
ISO AUTO
ISO sensitivity

Exposure Setting Guide

AE lock/FEL lock

Shutter speed indicator

Aperture indicator

Histogram

Location information
90°44′55″N
233°44′55″W
Latitude/longitude information

Digital level gauge

Audio level

DRO/Auto HDR/Auto HDR image warning

Picture Effect error

2016-1-1
10:37AM
Date of recording
3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode

REC Control

Spot metering area

00:00:00:00
Time code (hour:minute:second:frame)
00 00 00 00
User Bit
[9] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Icons and indicators

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during

playback)

You can change the display contents on the screen.

1 Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.

To switch the information displayed on the viewfinder, press the DISP button while
looking into the viewfinder.
Each time you press the DISP button, the recording information display changes.
The displayed contents and their position are just a guideline, and may differ from the
actual display.

During shooting (Monitor)

Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → For viewfinder → Display All
Info.

During shooting (Viewfinder)

Level → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level

During playback (Monitor/Viewfinder)

Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.

If the image has flare or black defects, the corresponding section blinks on the
histogram display (flare/black defects warning).
 The settings for playback are also applied in [Auto Review].

Histogram display
A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by
luminance. It shows darker toward the left and brighter toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.
Peaks at the right and left ends of the histogram indicate that the image has flare and black
defects, respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform
exposure compensation before shooting as necessary.

(A): Pixel count

(B): Contrast

Note
The viewfinder display and the monitor display for shooting can be set separately. Look through the
viewfinder to set the display settings for the viewfinder.

[Histogram] is not displayed during panorama shooting.

The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information
about image displayed on the screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.

The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:
When the flash is used
When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene

In movie mode, [For viewfinder] cannot be displayed.

 Hint
The following are not displayed in the default settings.
Graphic Display
Display All Info. (when using the viewfinder)

To change the display modes, press MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] and
change the setting.

[10] Names of parts/Icons and indicators Icons and indicators

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in
shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] or [Finder] →

desired setting → [Enter].

The items marked with are available.

Menu item details

Graphic Display :
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions.
When the product is level in both directions, the indicator turns to green.
For viewfinder*:
Displays information suited for shooting with the viewfinder.
* This screen mode is available only in the setting for [Monitor].

Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.

The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the
level.

[11] Preparing the camera

Checking the camera and the supplied items

The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.

Camera (1)
Power cord (mains lead) (1)* (supplied in some countries/regions)

* Multiple power cords may be supplied with your camera. Use the appropriate one that matches your
country/region.

NP-FW50 Rechargeable battery pack (1)

 Micro USB Cable (1)

AC Adaptor (1)

Shoulder strap (1)

Eyepiece cup (1)

Body cap (1) (attached to the camera)

Shoe cap (1) (attached to the camera)
Instruction Manual (1)
Wi-Fi Connection/One-touch (NFC) Guide (1)

[12] Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack

Inserting/removing the battery pack

1 Open the battery/memory card cover.

 2 Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery
until the battery locks into place.

3 Close the cover.

To remove the battery pack

Turn off the camera and press lock lever (A), then remove the battery pack. Be careful not to
drop the battery pack.
[13] Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack

Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the

camera

1 Turn the power off.

2 Connect the camera with the battery pack inserted to the AC Adaptor (supplied)
using the micro USB cable (supplied), and connect the AC Adaptor to the wall outlet
(wall socket).

Charge lamp on the camera (orange)

Lit: Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not within
the proper temperature range

Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 150 min.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F). Charging may take longer depending on conditions of
use and circumstances.
The charge lamp turns off when charging is completed.
If the charge lamp lights up and then immediately turns off, the battery pack is fully
charged.
 Note
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery pack or
disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then re-insert it to recharge.

If the charge lamp on the camera flashes when the AC Adaptor is connected to the wall outlet (wall
socket), this indicates that charging is temporarily stopped because the temperature is outside the
recommended range. When the temperature gets back within the appropriate range, the charging
resumes. We recommend charging the battery pack at an ambient temperature of between 10°C to
30°C (50ºF to 86ºF).

Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using the supplied or recommended AC Adaptor/battery
charger. If any malfunction occurs while using this product, disconnect the plug from the wall outlet
(wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source. If you use the product with a charge
lamp, note that the product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp turns off.

When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long
time, the charge lamp may flash quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the
battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then re-insert it to recharge.

Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged
or close to fully charged. Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.

When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket).

Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs, micro USB cables (supplied) and AC
Adaptors (supplied).

[14] Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack

Charging by connecting to a computer

The battery pack can be charged by connecting the camera to a computer using a micro USB
cable.

1 Turn off the product, and connect to the USB terminal of the computer.
 Note
If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop
battery level decreases. Do not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended
period of time.

Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB
connection has been established between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a
malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or waking the computer from sleep
mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Proper operation cannot be guaranteed on all types of computers.

Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer

connected through a USB hub.

The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.

[15] Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack

Battery life and number of recordable images

Battery life Number of images

Screen mode ‐ Approx. 350

Shooting (still images)
Viewfinder mode ‐ Approx. 310

Screen mode Approx. 70 min. ‐

Actual shooting (movies)
Viewfinder mode Approx. 65 min. ‐

Screen mode Approx. 105 min. ‐

Continuous shooting (movies)
Viewfinder mode Approx. 105 min. ‐

Note
The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack
has been fully charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the
conditions of use.

The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting under the
following conditions:
Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Using a E PZ 16-50mm F3.5-5.6 OSS lens (sold separately)
Using a Sony SDXC memory card of UHS Speed Class 3 ( ) (sold separately)
[Viewfinder Bright.]: [Manual][±0]
 [Monitor Brightness]: [Manual][±0]
[Display Quality]: [Standard]

The numbers for “Shooting (still images)” are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the
following conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)
DISP: [Display All Info.]
Focus Mode: [Automatic AF]
One picture is taken every 30 seconds.
The flash strobes once for every two pictures.
The power is turned on and off once every ten times.

The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the
following conditions:
The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 60p 50M /50p 50M.
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand-by,
turning on/off, etc.
Continuous shooting (movies): Battery life based on non-stop shooting until the limit (29 minutes)
has been reached, and then continued by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button again. Other
functions, such as zooming, are not operated.

[16] Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Use the supplied AC adaptor to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall
outlet (wall socket). This conserves the camera's battery power.

1 Insert the battery pack into the camera.

2 Connect the camera to the wall outlet (wall socket) with a micro USB cable
(supplied) and an AC adaptor (supplied).

Note
The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack
into the camera.

If you use the camera while power is being supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket), make sure that
the icon ( ) is displayed on the monitor.

Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you
remove the battery pack, the camera will be turned off.

Do not remove the battery pack while the access lamp is lit. The data in the memory card may be
damaged.
 As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to
the AC Adaptor.

Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you
are using the AC adaptor.

Do not remove the Micro USB cable while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). Before
you remove the Micro USB cable, turn off the camera.

Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened
while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket).

When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be
careful of the remaining power on the mobile charger during use.

[17] Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack

Notes on the battery pack

Notes on using the battery pack

Be sure to use only battery packs specified for this product.

The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or
environmental conditions.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct
sunlight.

Charging the battery pack

Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the
battery pack each time before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities
to shoot images.
Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can
result in leaks, overheating, explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery
pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then reinsert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and
30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F). The battery pack may not be effectively charged in temperatures
outside this range.
When you connect this product and a laptop computer that is not connected to a power
source, the laptop’s battery charge may decrease. Do not charge this product using the
laptop computer for too long.
Do not turn on/restart a computer, wake a computer from sleep mode, or turn off a computer
while this product is connected to the computer via USB cable. Doing so may cause a
 malfunction of this product. Disconnect the product and the computer before performing the
above operations.
We do not guarantee charging if you are using a self-built or modified computer.
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket) or
disconnect the USB cable from the camera. Not doing so may result in a shorter battery life.

Remaining battery indicator

The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen.

A: Battery level high

B: Battery exhausted

It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery indicator to appear.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or
environmental conditions.
If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display
Setting) button to display it.

Charging time (Full charge)

The charging time is approximately 150 minutes using the AC adaptor (supplied).
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature
of 25 °C (77 °F). Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.

Effective use of the battery pack

Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the

operational time of the battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we
recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket close to your body to warm it up, and
insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any metal objects
such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.
The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function
frequently, turn the power on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual
shots.
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack
may not be properly charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust
using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.

How to store the battery pack

To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the
camera at least once a year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after
removing it from the camera.
 On battery life

The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for
a long period, the battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is
shortened significantly, it is probably time to replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating
conditions and environment in which each battery pack is used.

[18] Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack

Notes on charging the battery pack

The supplied AC Adaptor is dedicated to this product. Do not connect with other electronic
devices. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Make sure to use a genuine Sony AC Adaptor.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged,
and then insert the same battery pack firmly back into the product.
If the charge lamp
flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or that a battery pack other than the
specified type has been inserted.
Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or
different one and check that the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly
inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously inserted battery may be faulty.
If the charge lamp flashes even if the AC Adaptor is connected to the product and the wall
outlet (wall socket), this indicates that charging has stopped temporarily and is on standby.
Charging stops and enters standby status automatically when the temperature is outside of
the recommended operating temperature. When the temperature returns to the appropriate
range, charging resumes and the charge lamp lights up again. We recommend charging the
battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).

[19] Preparing the camera Inserting a memory card (sold separately)

Inserting/removing a memory card

Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the product.

1 Open the battery/memory card cover.

2 Insert the memory card.

With the notched corner facing in the direction illustrated, insert the memory card until
it clicks into place. Insert the memory card correctly. Not doing so may cause a
malfunction.

3 Close the cover.

Hint
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format
the card on the camera for more stable performance of the memory card.
To remove the memory card
Open the memory card cover and make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit, then push in the
memory card lightly once to remove it.

[20] Preparing the camera Inserting a memory card (sold separately)

Memory cards that can be used

You can use the following types of memory cards with this camera. The mark indicates that
these memory cards can be used for shooting still images or movies.
When using Memory Stick Micro media or microSD memory card with this camera, make sure
to use with the appropriate adaptor.

For movies
Memory card For still images
MP4 AVCHD XAVC S

Memory Stick PRO Duo －

(Mark2 only) (Mark2 only)

Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo *1

Memory Stick Micro (M2) －

(Mark2 only) (Mark2 only)

SD memory card *2 *2 －

SDHC memory card *2 *2 *3

SDXC memory card *2 *2 *3

microSD memory card *2 *2 －

microSDHC memory card *2 *2 *3

microSDXC memory card *2 *2 *3

*1 Movies cannot be recorded in 100 Mbps or more.
*2 SD Speed Class 4 ( ) or faster, or UHS Speed Class U1 ( ) or faster
*3 SD Speed Class10 ( ), or UHS Speed Class U1 ( ) or faster
When recording in 100 Mbps or more, UHS Speed Class U3 ( ) is required.

Note
When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over extended periods of time, the
recorded movies will be divided into files 4 GB in size. The divided files can be handled as a single
file by importing them to a computer using PlayMemories Home.

[21] Preparing the camera Inserting a memory card (sold separately)

Notes on memory card

If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in
the memory card may occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of
shooting. If this happens, save your images to a computer or other storage location, then
execute [Format] using this camera.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the
camera off while the access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to
become damaged.
Be sure to back up the data for protection.
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
Images recorded on an SDXC memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers
or AV devices that are not compatible with exFAT when connected using a micro USB
cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with exFAT before connecting it to the
camera.
If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be prompted to format the
card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the
card.
(exFAT is the file system used on SDXC memory cards.)
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present

If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations
subject to static electricity or electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become
damaged.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally
 swallow it.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when
you handle it.
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product.
Format the memory card using this product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the
equipment used.
Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor.
If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of a memory card is set to the LOCK
position, you cannot record or delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record
position.
To use a Memory Stick Micro media or microSD memory card with this product:
Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card
into the product without a memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from
the product.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory
card is inserted in the correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is
not inserted properly, it may result in a malfunction.

About Memory Stick PRO Duo media and Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo media:

This Memory Stick is equipped with MagicGate function. MagicGate is copyright

protection technology that uses encryption technology.
Data recording/playback that requires MagicGate functions cannot be performed with
this product.
High-speed data transfer using a parallel interface is supported.

[22] Preparing the camera Attaching a lens

Attaching/removing a lens

Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the lens.

1 Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the rear of
the lens.
 When shooting, remove the front lens cap from the front of the lens.

2 Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on the
lens and camera.

Hold the camera with the lens mount facing down to prevent dust and debris from
entering the camera.

3 While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the
direction of the arrow until it clicks into the locked position.
 Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.

Removing the lens

Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of the arrow until it
stops.
After removing the lens, attach the body cap to the camera and the lens caps to the front and
rear of the lens to prevent dust and debris from entering the camera and lens.

Note
When attaching/removing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location.

Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.

Do not use force when attaching a lens.

A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold separately). When using
the Mount Adaptor, refer to the operating manual supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of the lens to help
balance the weight of the lens.

When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the lens firmly.

Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.

[23] Preparing the camera Attaching a lens

Attaching the lens hood

We recommend that you use the lens hood to prevent light outside the shooting frame from
affecting the image.

1 Match the shape of the lens hood mounting part and lens head, and turn the lens
hood clockwise until it clicks.

Note
Attach the lens hood properly. Otherwise, the lens hood may not have any effect or may be partially
reflected in the image.

When the lens hood is attached properly, the lens hood index (red line) matches the red index mark
on the hood.
(There may be no lens hood index on some lenses.)

Remove the lens hood when using the flash as the lens hood blocks the flash light and may appear
as a shadow on the image.

To store the lens hood after shooting, attach the lens hood to the lens backward.

[24] Preparing the camera Attaching accessories

Mount Adaptor

Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold separately) to
this product.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.
 Note
When a setting other than [Continuous Shooting: Lo] is selected for [Cont. Shooting], the focus is
locked during the first shot, even if [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor with certain lenses. Consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility on compatible lenses.

When shooting movies while using an LA-EA1 or LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (both sold separately), the
Auto Focus only works when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.

You cannot use the AF illuminator when using an A-mount lens.

The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] →
[Off].

It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on the lens used or the
subject.

The light of the flash may be blocked by the lens attached.

[25] Preparing the camera Attaching accessories

LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA1 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold
separately), the following functions are available.

Autofocus:
Available with SAM/SSM lens only
AF system:
Contrast AF/Phase Detection AF
AF/MF select:
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF*
* This setting is unavailable when [ AF System] is set to [Contrast AF].

When using a Mount Adaptor and the camera is set to movie mode, the Auto Focus only
works when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.
When using a Mount Adaptor in movie mode, adjust the aperture manually.

Available focus area:

When the LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor is mounted, the available focus areas are the same
as for the available settings of this camera.
[Zone], [Expand Flexible Spot] or [Lock-on AF] cannot be selected when [ AF System] is set
to [Phase Detection AF].
SteadyShot:
In-body

[26] Preparing the camera Attaching accessories

LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold
separately), the following functions are available.

Autofocus:
Available
AF system:
Phase Detection AF, which is controlled by the dedicated AF sensor inside the Mount Adaptor
AF/MF select:
Lenses that do not support DMF: Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.
Lenses that support DMF: Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens. When the
switch on the lens is set to AF, you can use MENU to change the focusing method.
Other lenses: Can be changed using MENU.
Focus Mode:
LA-EA2: Single-shot AF/Continuous AF/DMF*
LA-EA4: Single-shot AF/Continuous AF/Automatic AF/DMF*
* Only available when using lenses that support Direct Manual Focus.

Even if [Priority Set in AF-S] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], the camera will temporarily
switch to [AF].
Even if [Priority Set in AF-C] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], the camera will temporarily
switch to [Release].

Available focus area:

Wide/Center/Flexible Spot/Lock-on AF
SteadyShot:
In-body

[27] Preparing the camera

Setting language, date and time

The setting screen for language, date and time is displayed automatically when you turn on this
product for the first time, initialize this product or when the internal rechargeable backup battery
has discharged.

1 Turn on the camera.

The language setting screen will appear and then setting screen for date and time will
appear.

2 Select your language, and then press the center of the control wheel.

3 Check that [Enter] is selected on the screen, then press the center.

4 Select your desired geographic location, and then press the center.

5 Select a setting item using the top/bottom side of the control wheel or by turning the
control wheel, then press the center.

6 Set [Daylight Savings], [Date/Time], and [Date Format] using the top/bottom/left/right
sides, then press the center.

Midnight is indicated as 12:00 AM, and noon as 12:00 PM.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other items, then select [Enter] and press the center.

On maintaining the date and time

This camera has an internal rechargeable battery for maintaining the date and time and other
settings regardless of whether the power is on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or
discharged.
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the
camera, and leave the product for 24 hours or more with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup
battery may be worn out. Consult your service facility.

Hint
To cancel the date and time setting procedure, press the MENU button.

To set the date and time or geographic location again after the date and time setting is finished,
 select MENU → (Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] or [Area Setting].

Note
If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears
every time you turn on the camera.

This camera does not have a function for inserting the date on images. You can insert the date on
images and then save and print them using PlayMemories Home (for Windows only).

[28] Preparing the camera

In-Camera Guide

The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.
Assign the [In-Camera Guide] function to the desired key in advance using [Custom
Key(Shoot.)].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → desired key, then

assign the [In-Camera Guide] function to the key.

The [In-Camera Guide] function cannot be assigned to some keys.

2 Select the MENU or Fn item of which you want to see descriptions, then press the
button to which the [In-Camera Guide] function is assigned.

The descriptions of the item are displayed.

[29] Shooting

Shooting still images

1 Select the desired shooting mode by turning the mode dial.

 2 Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera.
Or look through the viewfinder and
hold the camera.

3 When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by rotating the zoom ring.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

When the image is in focus, a beep sounds and the indicator (such as ) lights up.

5 Press the shutter button fully down.

To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)
Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus mode.

1. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Single-shot AF] or [Automatic AF].

2. Place the subject within the AF area and press the shutter button halfway down.
 The focus is locked.

If it is difficult to focus on the desired subject, set [Focus Area] to [Center] or [Flexible
Spot].

3. Keep pressing the shutter button halfway down, and place the subject back in the original
position to re-compose the shot.

4. Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.

Hint
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep does not
sound. Either recompose the shot or change the focus setting.
In [Continuous AF] mode, lights
up and the beep indicating that the focus has been achieved does not sound.

Note
When the subject is moving, you cannot lock the focus even if [Focus Mode] has been set to
[Automatic AF].

[30] Shooting Focusing

Focus Mode

Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details
(Single-shot AF):
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
(Automatic AF):
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it
determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to focus when the subject is in motion.
During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF from the
second shot.
(Continuous AF):
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use
this when the subject is in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera
focuses.
(DMF):

You can make fine adjustments manually after the focus is locked, letting you focus on a subject
more quickly than when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in
situations such as macro shooting.
(Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use
manual focus.

Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of
the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.

Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances

Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.
 When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while
focusing. This does not affect the actual recorded images.

Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available in the movie shooting mode.

Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been
assigned the [Focus Hold] function.

[31] Shooting Auto focus

Focus Area

Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus
mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Wide :
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press
the shutter button halfway down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed
around the area that is in focus.
Zone :
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus
area.
Center :
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock
function to create the composition you want.
Flexible Spot :
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an
extremely small subject in a narrow area.
Expand Flexible Spot :
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible
spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
Lock-on AF :
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within
the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to
[Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Lock-on AF] on the [Focus Area] setting screen, and then
adjust the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can
also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot
or expand flexible spot.

List of focus range finder frames

The focus range finder frame differs as follows depending on the shooting mode.
When focusing on a larger area

When focusing on a smaller area

When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone] and you aim at a moving subject, the focus
range finder frame for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1 or LA-EA3) (sold
separately) and [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], the focus range finder
frame for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.

When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is
disabled and the focus area frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority
on and around the center area.

To move the focus area

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], if pressing the
button to which [Focus Standard] is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focus area
 using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel. To change the shooting settings
using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set
[Touch Operation] to other than [Off] beforehand.

Note
[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
During Smile Shutter mode

The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all
the way down at once.

When the mode dial is set to (Movie/S&Q Motion) or during movie shooting, [Lock-on AF] cannot
be selected as the [Focus Area].

When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the size of the AF range finder frame may be
automatically adjusted according to the subject and the composition as follows:
When focusing on a wider area such as a landscape: A larger AF range finder frame is displayed.
When focusing on a smaller area such as flowers or small items: A smaller AF range finder frame
is displayed.

You cannot perform functions assigned to the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or the
custom button 3 while moving the focusing frame.

[32] Shooting Auto focus

Phase detection AF

When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the
combined autofocus of the phase detection AF and contrast AF.

Note
When the F-value is greater than F11, you cannot use the Phase Detection AF. Only Contrast AF is
available.

Phase detection AF is available only when an applicable lens is attached. If you use a lens that does
not support focal plane phase detection AF, you cannot use [Automatic AF], [ AF Track Sens] or [
AF drive speed].
Also, even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase detection AF might not
function unless you update the lens.
[33] Shooting Auto focus

Focus Standard

If you assign [Focus Standard] to the desired custom key, you can recall useful functions such
as moving the focusing frame quickly, etc., depending on the focus area settings.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → desired button, then

assign the [Focus Standard] function to the button.

2 Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.

What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the settings for [Focus Area]
and [Center Lock-on AF].

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot]:
You can move the position of the focus area using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Center]:
When [Center Lock-on AF] is set to [On], [Center Lock-on AF] is activated by pressing the
key. The camera detects the subject positioned in the center of the screen and starts
tracking by pressing the center of the control wheel.
When [Center Lock-on AF] is set to [Off], the camera focuses on the center point.

Note
You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].

[34] Shooting Auto focus

AF/MF control

You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting
without changing your holding position.

1 Switch the AF/MF/AEL switch lever to the AF/MF position, then press the AF/MF
button.
During auto focus:
Temporarily switches the focusing mode to manual. Adjust the focus by turning the focus ring
(A) while holding down the AF/MF button.
During manual focus:
Temporarily switches the focusing mode to auto while the AF/MF button is held down, and locks
the focus.

Hint
If you select [AF/MF Ctrl Toggle] in [AF/MF Button] under [Custom Key(Shoot.)], the focusing mode
remains switched even if you remove your finger from the button.

Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Control Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of
the control wheel.

[35] Shooting Auto focus

AF w/ shutter (still image)

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select
[Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.
Useful method to micro-adjust the focus
When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than
the shutter button lets you focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.

1. Set [ AF w/ shutter] to [Off].

2. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → assign the [AF On] and
[Focus Magnifier] functions to the desired keys.
3. Set [ Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to avoid auto focusing when you look through the viewfinder.
4. Press the key to which the [AF On] function is assigned.
5. Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus
ring for micro-adjustments of the focus.
6. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

[36] Shooting Auto focus

AF On

You can focus using any button instead of pressing the shutter button halfway down. The
settings for [Focus Mode] will be applied.

1 MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[Custom Key(Shoot.)]→desired key, then assign

the [AF On] function to the key.

2 Press the key to which you have assigned the [AF On] function while auto-focus
shooting.

Hint
Set [ AF w/ shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto focusing using the shutter
button.

Set [ AF w/ shutter], [ Pre-AF], and [ Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to focus at a specific shooting
distance predicting the position of the subject.

[37] Shooting Auto focus

Eye AF
The camera focuses on the subject's eyes while you keep the button pressed.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → desired key, then

assign the [Eye AF] function to the key.

2 Point the camera at a person's face, and press the button to which you have
assigned the [Eye AF] function.

3 Press the shutter button while pressing the button.

Hint
When the camera focuses on the eyes, a detection frame is displayed over the eyes. If the focus
mode is set to [Single-shot AF], the frame will disappear after a period of time.

Note
The camera may not be able to focus on the eyes depending on the circumstances, such as when no
eyes can be detected within the auto focus area. In such cases, the camera detects a face and
focuses on the face.

If the camera cannot detect a person’s face, you cannot use [Eye AF].

Depending on the circumstances, you cannot use [Eye AF] such as when [Focus Mode] is set to
[Manual Focus].

The [Eye AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the person is in the shade.
When the person is out of focus.
When the person is moving too much.

If the person is moving too much, the detection frame may not display correctly over their eyes.

[38] Shooting Auto focus

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where
you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area
than the flexible spot.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

3 Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the
position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

The focus will be achieved at point of in the center of the screen.

5 Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

The [ AF in Focus Mag.] function is canceled after shooting.

Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.

You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust
the focus position, adjust the focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button
halfway down.

Note
The edges of the screen may be unfocused.

The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.

[ AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

In [Sweep Panorama] mode
During movie shooting
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M.
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
 While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Eye AF]
[Center Lock-on AF]
[ Eye-Start AF]
[ Pre-AF]
[Smile/Face Detect.]
[ Auto Obj. Framing]

[39] Shooting Auto focus

Center Lock-on AF

When you press the center of the control wheel, the camera detects the subject positioned in
the center of the screen and continues to track the subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Center Lock-on AF] → [On].

2 Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press the center of the control wheel.

Press the center again to stop tracking.

3 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

Hint
You can select the subject to be tracked by touch operation when shooting using the monitor. Set
[Touch Operation] to other than [Off].

Note
 The [Center Lock-on AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:
The subject is moving too quickly.
The subject is too small, or too large.
The contrast between the subject and the background is poor.
It is dark.
The ambient light changes.

Lock-on AF does not work in the following situations:

[Sweep Panorama]
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur].
When shooting in Manual Focus mode.
When using the digital zoom
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].

[40] Shooting Auto focus

Pre-AF (still image)

The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
[ Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.

[41] Shooting Auto focus

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through an Electronic Viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Eye-Start AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details
On:
Auto focusing starts when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.
Off:
Auto focusing does not start when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.

Hint
[ Eye-Start AF] is available when an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA2, LA-EA4) (sold
separately) are attached.

[42] Shooting Auto focus

Priority Set in AF-S

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [Focus Mode] is set
to [Single-shot AF], [DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is remaining still.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

[43] Shooting Auto focus

Priority Set in AF-C

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is
activated and the subject is in motion.
 1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

[44] Shooting Auto focus

AF Illuminator (still image)

The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In
the time between pressing the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the red AF
illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Illuminator] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.

Note
You cannot use [ AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
In movie mode
Sweep Panorama
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is moving (when
the focus indicator or lights up).
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.
When [Scene Selection] is set to the following modes:
[Landscape]
[Sports Action]
[Night Scene]

When a Mount Adaptor is attached.

The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly
into the AF illuminator at close range.
[45] Shooting Auto focus

AF Area Auto Clear

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically
shortly after focus is achieved.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.

[46] Shooting Auto focus

Disp. cont. AF area

You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to
[Wide] or [Zone], in [Continuous AF] mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.

Note
When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center]
[Flexible Spot]
[Expand Flexible Spot]
 When an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1/LA-EA3) (sold separately) are mounted on the
camera and [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], [Disp. cont. AF area] is always turned
on regardless of the [Focus Area] settings.

[47] Shooting Auto focus

AF Micro Adj.

Allows you to adjust and register an autofocused position for each lens, when using an A-mount
lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 (sold separately).
In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this
function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths. Note that the auto focus
function may not be performed at a proper position when using this adjustment.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → select [AF Micro Adj.].

2 Select [AF Adjustment Set.] → [On].

3 [amount] → desired value.

The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the
product. The smaller the value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to
the product.

Hint
It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. Set [Focus Area] to
[Flexible Spot] and use a bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.

Note
When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears
on the screen. [±0] appears for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.

If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be
registered. To register a new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its
value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses using [Clear].

The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.]
with lenses other than the supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be
affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an unsupported lens.
 You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same
specification.

[48] Shooting Auto focus

AF System (still image)

Sets the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you attach an A-
mount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF System] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Phase Detection AF:
Focuses with Phase Detection AF.
The focusing speed is very fast.
Contrast AF:
Always focuses with Contrast AF.
The focusing speed is slower. Use when you cannot focus
with [Phase Detection AF].

Note
When [ AF System] is set to [Contrast AF], (Continuous AF) under [Focus Mode] is
unavailable.

The following functions are unavailable when [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF]:
[Zone], [Expand Flexible Spot], and [Lock-on AF] in [Focus Area]
[Eye AF]

When [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], even if [Priority Set in AF-S] is set to
[Balanced Emphasis], the camera will temporarily switch to [AF].

[49] Shooting Manual focus

Manual Focus

When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [Manual Focus].

 2 Rotate the focusing ring to achieve sharp focus.

When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.

The focus distance may not be displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is
attached.

3 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.

Note
When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct focus on the viewfinder.

[50] Shooting Manual focus

Direct manual focus (DMF)

You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a
subject more quickly than when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient
in situations such as macro shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → [DMF].

2 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.

3 Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the focusing ring to
achieve a sharper focus.
 When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.

The focus distance may not be displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is
attached.

4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.

[51] Shooting Manual focus

Focus Magnifier

You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [ MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

2 Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position
you want to enlarge using top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.

3 Confirm the focus.

When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is
magnified. The [Focus Magnifier] function will be canceled when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during
the auto-focusing, different functions are performed depending on the [ AF in Focus
Mag.] setting.

When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.

 When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is
canceled.

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time].

4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can adjust the focus on the magnified image touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to
other than [Off] beforehand. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can perform [Focus
Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor. While
shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping
and you can move the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of
the control wheel.

Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the
touch panel.

To end the focus magnifier function, double-tap again. When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off],
the focus magnifier function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

[52] Shooting Manual focus

MF Assist (still image)

Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in
Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].

2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the
control wheel.
 Note
You cannot use [ MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

[ MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier]
function instead.

Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera
Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time].

[53] Shooting Manual focus

Focus Magnif. Time

Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [ MF Assist] or [Focus
Magnifier] function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.

[54] Shooting Manual focus

Peaking Level

Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges using a specific color in Manual Focus or Direct Manual
Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Level] → desired setting.

Menu item details
High:
Sets the peaking level to high.
Mid:
Sets the peaking level to middle.
Low:
Sets the peaking level to low.
Off:
Does not use the peaking function.

Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the
subject and lens.

The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced when the product is connected using an HDMI cable.

[55] Shooting Manual focus

Peaking Color

Sets the color used for the peaking function in Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Color] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Red:
Enhances outlines in red.
Yellow:
Enhances outlines in yellow.
White:
Enhances outlines in white.

[56] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Drive Mode
Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or
bracketing shooting.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

Menu item details

Single Shooting:
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting:
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer:
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont):
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of
seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket:
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
Single Bracket:
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
WB bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings
for white balance, color temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action] is selected, [Single
Shooting] cannot be performed.

[57] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Cont. Shooting

Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Shooting].

 You can also set the continuous shooting by selecting MENU→ (Camera
Settings1) → [Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Continuous Shooting: Hi+ :
Images are shot continuously at the maximum speed while you press and hold down the shutter
button.
Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/ Continuous
Shooting: Lo:
Subjects are easier to track because the subject is displayed in real-time on the monitor or
viewfinder during shooting.

Hint
To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:
[Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]
[ AEL w/ shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]

Note
The shooting speed during continuous shooting becomes slower when [e-Front Curtain Shut.] is set
to [Off] in [Continuous Shooting: Hi], [Continuous Shooting: Mid] or [Continuous Shooting: Lo] mode.

The subject is not displayed in real-time on the monitor or viewfinder when shooting in [Continuous
Shooting: Hi+] mode.

Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and a scene other than [Sports Action] is selected.
[Picture Effect] is set to one of the following:
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
[Rich-tone Mono.]
[Miniature]
[Watercolor]
[Illustration]
[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
[ISO] is set to [Multi Frame NR].
[Smile Shutter] is being used.

[58] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Self-timer
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to
be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing
the shutter button.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated
number of seconds have elapsed.

Menu item details

Sets the number of seconds in which the picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.

Self-timer: 10 Sec
Self-timer: 5 Sec
Self-timer: 2 Sec

Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-
timer.

Press / on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.

Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to mute the beep sound during self-timer counting.

To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode, then select MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Brkt].

Note
The self-timer is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
[Sports Action] under [Scene Selection]
[Smile Shutter]
[59] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Self-timer(Cont)

Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of
seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from
multiple shots.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Self-timer(Cont)].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated
number of seconds have elapsed. The designated number of pictures are taken
continuously.

Menu item details

For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is
pressed when [Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.

Hint
Press the shutter button again or press / on the control wheel to stop the count of the self-
timer.

Press / on the control wheel and select (Single Shooting) to cancel the self-timer.
[60] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Cont. Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then
to lighter. You can select an image that suits your purpose after recording.

1 Press / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Cont. Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The base exposure is set at the first shot.

Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.

Menu item details

For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously with an exposure value
shifted by plus or minus 0.3 EV when [Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.

Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the
ISO value. If a setting other than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the
shutter speed.

When you adjust the exposure, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]

When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash
light even if [Cont. Bracket] is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.
[61] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Single Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then
to lighter. You can select the image that suits your purpose after recording.
If pictures are taken one by one by pressing the shutter button each time, you can adjust the
focus or the composition for each shot.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [Single Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Press the shutter button for each image.

Menu item details

For example, the camera shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted
by plus or minus 0.3 EV when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.

Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the
ISO value. If a setting other than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the
shutter speed.

When you adjust the exposure, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
[62] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Indicator during bracket shooting

Viewfinder
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Monitor (Display All Info. or Histogram)

Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV

Monitor (For viewfinder)

Ambient light* bracketing (upper indicator)
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Flash bracketing (lower indicator)

3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV

* Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting.
Whereas the flash light blinks for a moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."

Note
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under
the bracket indicator.

When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records
images.
[63] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

WB bracket

Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings
for white balance, color temperature and color filter.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [WB bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Menu item details

White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of
10MK-1*).
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of
20MK-1*).
* MK-1 is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and
indicates the same value as "mired."

Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

[64] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

DRO Bracket

You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → [DRO Bracket].

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

2 Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Menu item details

DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv
2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv
3, and Lv 5).

Note
The last shot is shown on the auto review.

[65] Shooting Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)

Bracket Settings

You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure
bracketing and white balance bracketing.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → select bracket shooting mode.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].
 2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Selftimer during Brkt:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds
until the shutter is released if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)

[66] Shooting Using touch functions

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations,"
and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad
operations."

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Touch Panel+Pad:
Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad
operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only:
Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only:
Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Off:
Deactivates all touch operations.

Note
Touch pad operations cannot be used with applications downloaded from PlayMemories Camera
Apps.
[67] Shooting Using touch functions

Touch Focus

You can select a subject on which to focus using touch operations in the still image and movie
recording modes.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → Desired setting other than [Off].

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
You can focus on the desired position by touching the monitor.

1. Select a [Focus Area] other than [Flexible Spot].

2. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Center Lock-on AF] → [Off].
3. Touch the monitor.
When shooting with the monitor, touch the subject to focus.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching
and dragging on the monitor while looking through the viewfinder.

When the shutter button is pressed halfway down, the camera focuses on the focusing
frame. Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch or press the center of the control
wheel if shooting with the monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting
with the viewfinder.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode
(spot focus)
The camera will focus on the touched subject. Spot focus is not available when shooting with
the viewfinder.

1. Select a [Focus Area] other than [Flexible Spot].

2. MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Center Lock-on AF] → [Off].
3. Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.
When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and
the focus can be adjusted using the focus ring.
 To cancel spot focus, touch or press the center of the control wheel.

Hint
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], the focusing frame can be
moved using touch operations.
When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-
tapping the monitor.

These touch operations can also be used in applications downloaded from PlayMemories Camera
Apps.

Note
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
When using the digital zoom
When using the LA-EA2 or LA-EA4
When using the LA-EA1 or LA-EA3, and the shooting mode is set to Movie

The touch focus function cannot be used with applications downloaded from PlayMemories Camera
Apps.

[68] Shooting Using touch functions

Touch Pad Area Set.

Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can
prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Pad Area Set.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Whole Screen:
Uses the entire monitor as the touch pad.
Right 1/2 Area:
Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touch pad.
Right 1/4 Area:
Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touch pad.
[69] Shooting Using touch functions

Touch Pad (vertical)

Sets whether or not to activate touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder in the
vertical position. You can prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching
the monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Pad (vertical)] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates touch pad operations.
Off:
Deactivates touch pad operations.

[70] Shooting Selecting still image size/image quality

Image Size (still image)

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on
large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Image Size] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]
L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels
M: 12M 4240×2832 pixels
S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels
When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9]
L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels
M: 10M 4240×2400 pixels
S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

Note
When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images corresponds
to "L."
[71] Shooting Selecting still image size/image quality

Aspect Ratio (still image)

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.

Menu item details

3:2:
Suitable for standard prints.
16:9:
For viewing on a high-definition TV.

[72] Shooting Selecting still image size/image quality

Quality (still image)

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

RAW:
File format: RAW (Records using the RAW compression format)

Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a
computer for professional purposes.

The image size is fixed to the maximum size. The image size is not displayed on the screen.

RAW & JPEG:

File format: RAW (Records using the RAW compression format) + JPEG

A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need
2 image files, a JPEG for viewing, and a RAW for editing. The JPEG image quality is set to
[Fine].
Extra fine:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format and recorded using a higher quality than with
[Fine].
Fine:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format when recorded.
Standard:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format when recorded. Since the compression rate of
[Standard] is higher than that of [Fine], the file size of [Standard] is smaller than that of [Fine].
This will allow more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality will be
lower.

About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Image Data Converter is
needed. With Image Data Converter, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a
popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or readjust the white balance, saturation or
contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However,
resolution is limited to 12 bits in the following shooting modes:

[ Long Exposure NR]

[BULB]
Continuous shooting
(including continuous shooting in [Superior Auto] mode)
[ Silent Shooting]

Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG
format.

You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.

[73] Shooting Selecting still image size/image quality

Panorama: Size

Sets the image size when shooting panoramic images. The image size varies depending on the
[Panorama: Direction] setting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Size] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Up] or [Down]
Standard: 3872×2160
Wide: 5536×2160

When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Left] or [Right]

Standard: 8192×1856
Wide: 12416×1856

[74] Shooting Selecting still image size/image quality

Panorama: Direction

Sets the direction to pan the camera when shooting panoramic images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Direction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Right:
Pan the camera from the left to the right.
Left:
Pan the camera from the right to the left.
Up:
Pan the camera from the bottom to the top.
Down:
Pan the camera from the top to the bottom.

[75] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

List of mode dial function

You can select the desired shooting mode by turning the mode dial.
 Available functions

(Auto Mode):
Allows you to shoot still images of any subject under any condition with good results by setting
the values determined appropriate by the product.
P (Program Auto):
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value (F value)). Also you can select various settings using the menu.
A (Aperture Priority):
Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot when you want to blur the background, etc.
S (Shutter Priority):
Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by manually adjusting the shutter speed.
M (Manual Exposure):
Allows you to shoot still images with the desired exposure by adjusting the exposure (both the
shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).
1/2(Memory recall):
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in
advance.
(Movie/S&Q Motion):
Allows you to change the exposure mode for movie recording and slow-motion/quick-motion
movie recording.
(Sweep Panorama):
Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the images.
SCN (Scene Selection):
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.

[76] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Intelligent Auto

The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.

1 Turn the mode dial to (Auto Mode).

 2 MENU→ (Camera Settings1)→[Auto Mode]→[Intelligent Auto].

3 Point the camera at the subject.

When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the
screen.

4 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Note
The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom functions other than
optical zoom.

The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.

[77] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Superior Auto

The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark or
backlit scenes.

For low-lit or backlit scenes, if necessary the camera may shoot multiple images and create a
composite image, etc., to record higher quality images than in Intelligent Auto mode.

1 Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Auto Mode] → [Superior Auto].

 3 Point the camera to the subject.

When the camera recognizes a scene, scene recognition icon appears on the screen. If
necessary, appropriate shooting function for the recognized scene and the number of
times the shutter is released also appear.

4 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

When the camera shoots multiple images, it automatically chooses and saves the
appropriate image. You can also save all the images by setting the [S. Auto Img. Extract.].

Note
When the product is used to create composite images, the recording process takes longer than
usual.

The product will not recognize the scene when you use zoom functions other than optical zoom.

The product may not properly recognize a scene under some shooting conditions.

When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the product cannot create a composite image.

[78] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

S. Auto Img. Extract.

Sets whether or not to save all the images that were shot continuously in [Superior Auto].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [S. Auto Img. Extract.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Saves one appropriate image selected by the product.
Off:
Saves all of the images.

Note
Even if you set [S. Auto Img. Extract.] to [Off] with [Hand-held Twilight] selected as the scene
recognition mode, one combined image is saved.

When the Auto Framing function is activated, two images are saved even if you set [S. Auto Img.
Extract.] to [Auto].

When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the shooting function will be limited.

[79] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Switching the auto mode (Auto Mode)

Switch the auto mode between [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto].

1 Set the mode dial to .

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Auto Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Intelligent Auto:
Shoots using automatic scene recognition.
Superior Auto:
Shoots automatically while reducing blurring and noise.

[80] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

About Scene Recognition

Scene Recognition operates in [Intelligent Auto] mode and [Superior Auto] mode.

This function allows the product to automatically recognize the shooting conditions and shoot
the image.
 Scene Recognition

When the product recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed on
the first line:

(Portrait)
(Infant)
(Night Portrait)
(Night Scene)
(Backlight Portrait)
(Backlight)
(Landscape)
(Macro)
(Spotlight)
(Low Light)
(Night Scene using a tripod)
(Hand-held Twilight)

Image processing

[Cont. Shooting]/[Slow Sync.]/[Auto HDR]/[Daylight Sync.]/[Slow Shutter]/[Hand-held Twilight]

Note
When [Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [Off], the [Portrait], [Backlight Portrait], [Night Portrait] and [Infant]
scenes are not recognized.

[81] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

The advantages of automatic shooting

This camera is equipped with the following two automatic shooting modes: [Intelligent Auto] and
[Superior Auto].
(Intelligent Auto):
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition.
(Superior Auto):
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark or
backlit scenes.

Note
In [Superior Auto] mode, the recording process takes longer, since the product creates a composite
 image. In this case, the shutter sound is heard multiple times, but only one image is recorded.

For [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you
cannot adjust the settings on your own.

[82] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Program Auto

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value).

You can set shooting functions such as [ISO].

1 Set the mode dial to P (Program Auto).

2 Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

Program Shift
When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value)
combination without changing the appropriate exposure set by the camera.
Turn the control dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination with the shutter
button pressed halfway down, to adjust exposure.

“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the control dial.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off the
camera.

Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.

Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting you made.

When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while
maintaining the shift amount.
[83] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Aperture Priority

You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the
background.

1 Set the mode dial to A (Aperture Priority).

2 Select the desired value by turning the control dial.

Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject
are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter
speed on the shooting screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

Note
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

[84] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Shutter Priority

You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter
speed, for example, at the instant of the movement with high speed shutter, or as a trailing
image with low speed shutter.

1 Set the mode dial to S (Shutter Priority).

 2 Select the desired value by turning the control dial.

If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting
screen blinks. If this happens, change the shutter speed.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

Hint
Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.

When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

Note
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.

When [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer, noise
reduction will be done after shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open.
However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

[85] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Manual Exposure

You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and
aperture.

1 Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

2 Select the desired shutter speed by turning the control wheel.

Select the desired aperture value by turning the control dial.

You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel using MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Setup].
You can also set [ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value
automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value
 and shutter speed you have set.
When [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the ISO value you
have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter
speed or aperture value.
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered Manual)* to check the
exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the product.
* Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure. It is displayed using a numerical value on the monitor
and with a metering indicator on the viewfinder.

3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

Hint
By setting the AF/MF/AEL switch lever to AEL and rotating the control dial while pressing the AEL
button, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the
set exposure value. (Manual shift)

Note
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered
Manual indicator flashes.

The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

[86] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Bulb shooting

You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.
Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails of light, such as fireworks.

1 Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

2 Turn the control wheel counterclockwise until [BULB] is indicated.

3 Set the aperture value (F-value) by turning the control dial.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

5 Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.

As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.

Hint
When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode. If you use a lens whose infinity
point is unclear, adjust the focus on the fireworks in the area you want to focus on in advance.

In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to deteriorate, we recommend
that you start shooting while the camera is cool.

Images shot in [BULB] mode tend to be blurry. We recommend that you use a tripod or a remote
commander (sold separately) that has a shutter button lock function. Use a remote commander
supporting connection via multi/micro USB jack.

Note
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.

After shooting, noise reduction will be done for the same amount of time that the shutter was open.
However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.

You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
[Smile Shutter]
[Auto HDR]
[Picture Effect] is set to [HDR Painting] or [Rich-tone Mono.].
[Multi Frame NR]
When [Drive Mode] is set to the following:
[Cont. Shooting]
[Self-timer(Cont)]
[Cont. Bracket]

[ Silent Shooting]

If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed is
temporarily set to 30 seconds.
[87] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Sweep Panorama

Allows you to create a single panoramic image from multiple images shot while panning the
camera.

1 Set the mode dial to (Sweep Panorama).

2 Point the camera at the subject.

3 While pressing the shutter button halfway down, aim the camera at one end of the
desired panoramic composition.

You can change the shooting direction prior to shooting using the control dial.

(A) This part will not be shot.

4 Press the shutter button fully down.

5 Pan the camera to the end of the guide in the direction of the arrow on the monitor.
 (B) Guidance bar

Note
If the entire angle of the panoramic shot is not achieved within the set time, a gray area occurs in the
composite image. If this happens, move the product faster to record the full panoramic image.

When [Wide] is selected for [Panorama: Size], the entire angle of the panoramic shot may not be
achieved within the given time. If this happens, try shooting after changing [Panorama: Size] to
[Standard].

Since several images are stitched together, the stitched part may not be recorded smoothly in some
cases.

The images may be blurred in dark scenes.

When a light source such as a fluorescent light flickers, the brightness and color of a stitched image
may not be consistent.

When the whole angle of panoramic shooting and the AE/AF locked angle are very different in
brightness and focus, the shooting may not be successful. If this happens, change AE/AF locked
angle and shoot again.

The following situations are not suited for shooting Sweep Panorama:
Moving subjects.
Subjects that are too close to the product.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, beach, or a lawn.
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.
Subjects with brightness widely different from its surroundings such as the sun or a light bulb.

The Sweep Panorama shooting may be interrupted in the following situations:

When the camera is panned too fast or too slow.
The subject is too blurry.

Continuous shooting is performed during shooting Sweep Panorama and the shutter sound keeps
beeping until shooting is finished.

The following functions are not available with Sweep Panorama:

Smile/Face Detect.
Auto Obj. Framing
DRO/Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Picture Profile
Soft Skin Effect
 Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR
Lock-on AF
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom
Drive Mode
Bright Monitoring

The values of the settings for some functions are fixed with Sweep Panorama, as follows:
[ISO] is fixed to [ISO AUTO].
[Focus Area] is fixed to [Wide].
[Flash Mode] is fixed to [Flash Off].

[88] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Scene Selection

Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.

1 Set the mode dial to SCN (Scene Selection).

2 Turn the control dial to select the desired setting.

Menu item details

Portrait:
Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.

Sports Action:
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still.
The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

Macro:
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
 Landscape:
Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.

Sunset:
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

Night Scene:
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.

Hand-held Twilight:
Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken,
and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera-shake, and noise.

Night Portrait:
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
The flash does not pop up automatically. Pop up the flash manually before shooting.

Anti Motion Blur:

Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product
shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.
 Note
Under the following settings, the shutter speed is slower, so use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent the image from blurring:
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]

In the [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] mode, the shutter clicks 4 times and an image is
recorded.

If you select [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] with [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image
quality becomes [Fine] temporarily.

Reducing blur is less effective even in [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] when shooting the
following subjects:
Subjects with erratic movement.
Subjects that are too close to the product.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, a beach, or a lawn.
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.

In the case of [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur], block noise may occur when using a light
source that flickers, such as fluorescent lighting.

The minimum distance that you can come close to a subject does not change even if you select
[Macro]. For the minimum in-focus range, refer to the minimum distance of the lens attached to the
product.

Hint
To change the scene, rotate the control dial on the shooting screen and select a new scene.

[89] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered
with [ / Memory] in advance.

1 Set the mode dial to 1, 2 (Memory recall).

 2 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Camera
Settings1) → [ / Recall].

Hint
To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to 1 or 2, then select the desired
number by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.

Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled
with this camera.

Note
If you set [ / Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are
given priority and the original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before
shooting.

[90] Shooting Selecting a shooting mode

Movie/S&Q Motion

You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting or slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with [
S&Q Settings].

1 Turn the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).

2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Movie/S&Q Motion] → desired setting.

3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE (movie) button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Program Auto / Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value)
manually.

[91] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Exposure Comp.

Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by
auto exposure, you can make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.]
to the plus side or minus side, respectively (exposure compensation).

1 (Exposure Comp.) on the control wheel → press the left/right side of the control
wheel or turn the control wheel, and select the desired exposure range.

You can also select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.].

You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to + 5.0 EV.
You can check the exposure value you set on the shooting screen (A).
Monitor

Viewfinder
 Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]

When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set
to [ISO AUTO].

Only a value between -3.0 EV and + 3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the
screen when shooting. If you set an exposure beyond this range, the image brightness on the screen
does not show the effect, but it will be reflected in the recorded image.

You can adjust the exposure in a range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.

If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not
be able to get a satisfactory effect.

[92] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

You can adjust the exposure compensation using the control dial or the control wheel.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial or control wheel.
Wheel:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control wheel.
 Dial:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control dial.

Note
If you assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial, the function that was originally
assigned can be managed using the control wheel, and vice versa.

When the shooting mode is set to [Manual Exposure] and ISO is set to [ISO AUTO], [Dial/Wheel Ev
Comp] is disabled.

[93] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Exposure Set. Guide

You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Displays the guide.

[94] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Exposure step

You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation
values.
 1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure step] → desired setting.

Menu item details

0.3EV/0.5EV

[95] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Metering Mode

Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the
exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the
proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the
screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a
specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot:
Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends the setting for [Spot
Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the
composition or the position of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is
suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

Hint
When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot]
while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated
with the focus area.

When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Opt.] or [Auto HDR] function is
activated, the brightness and the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into
small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow. Make settings based on the shooting
 circumstances.

Note
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom

In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.

[96] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [Focus Area] is
set to [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters
brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Note
When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering
position is locked to the center.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Lock-on AF: Flexible Spot] or [Lock-on AF:Expand Flexible Spot], the
spot metering position coordinates to the Lock-on AF start position, but does not coordinate with the
tracking of the subject.

[97] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

AE lock
When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a
backlit subject or a subject near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears
to have the appropriate brightness and lock the exposure before shooting. To reduce the
brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and lock the
exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker
than the subject and lock the exposure of the entire screen.

1 Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.

2 Switch the AF/MF/AEL switch lever to the AEL position, then press the AEL button.

The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) is displayed.

3 Keep pressing the AEL button and focus on the subject again, then shoot the
picture.

Keep holding the AEL button down while taking a shot if you want to continue shooting
with the fixed exposure. Release the button to reset the exposure.

Hint
If you select the MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → [AEL Button] →
[AEL toggle], you can lock the exposure without holding down the button.

Note
[ AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical
zoom.

[98] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button
halfway down when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [Focus Mode] is set to
[Automatic AF], and the product determines that the subject is moving, or you shoot burst
images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode
when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.

Note
Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the [ AEL w/ shutter] settings.

[99] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering

mode.

2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.

You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Avg./ Highlight

Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.

The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.

The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in
[Exposure Std. Adjust].

The value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure
compensation value. The amount of exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure
compensation value.

If you set [Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing
will be reset.

[100] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Exp.comp.set

Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient
light, or just ambient light.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.

[101] Shooting Adjusting the exposure modes/metering modes

Zebra

The zebra pattern will appear over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the
IRE level that you set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zebra] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not display the zebra pattern.
70/75/80/85/90/95/100/100+/Custom1/Custom2:
Adjusts the brightness level.

Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness
level for [Zebra]. The settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are
registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively in the default settings.

To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The
zebra pattern will appear on areas that fall within the range you set.

To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will
appear over areas with a brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.

Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed during HDMI connection.

[102] Shooting Correcting brightness and contrast

D-Range Opt. (DRO)

By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow
between the subject and the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and
gradation.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Opt.].

2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
 D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level
from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong).

Note
In the following situations, [D-Range Opt.] is fixed to [Off]:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
Multi Frame NR
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]

[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the following modes are selected in [Scene Selection].
[Sunset]
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Hand-held Twilight]
[Anti Motion Blur]

The setting is fixed to [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when [Scene Selection] modes other than the
above modes are selected.

When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p 100M], [100p 100M], [120p 60M] or [100p 60M],
[DRO/Auto HDR] will be set to [Off].

When shooting with [D-Range Opt.], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the
recorded image, especially when you enhance the effect.

[103] Shooting Correcting brightness and contrast

Auto HDR

Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure,
the bright parts of an underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to
create images with a greater range of gradation (High Dynamic Range). One image with proper
exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].

2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
 Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level
from 1.0EV (weak) to 6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the
following exposure levels: -1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.

Hint
The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition before shooting.

Note
This function is not available when the [ Quality] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:

When [Multi Frame NR] is selected.
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].

You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.

You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the
shooting conditions.

When the flash is used, this function has little effect.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not
obtain good HDR images. will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when
the camera detects image blurring. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid
image blur, as needed.

[104] Shooting Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO

Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger
the number, the higher the sensitivity.

1 ISO (ISO) on the control wheel → select desired setting.

 You can also select MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [ISO].

Menu item details

Multi Frame NR:
Combines continuous shots to create an image with less noise. Press the right side to display
the setting screen, then select a desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
Select the desired ISO number from ISO AUTO or ISO 100 – ISO 51200.
ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 100 – ISO 51200:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

Note
When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.

When [Multi Frame NR] is selected, the flash, [D-Range Opt.], or [Auto HDR] cannot be used.

When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.

When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.

[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]

The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.

The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting
movies, or shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 25600 are available. If the ISO value is set to a
value larger than 25600, the setting is automatically switched to 25600. When you finish recording
the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

When you use [Multi Frame NR], it takes some time for the product to perform the overlay processing
of images.

When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will
be automatically adjusted within the set range.

Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select
[ISO AUTO] and press the right side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO
Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum]. The values are also applied when shooting in [ISO AUTO]
mode under [Multi Frame NR].

You can set the effect level for noise reduction by selecting [NR Effect] under [Multi Frame NR].
[105] Shooting Selecting the ISO sensitivity

ISO AUTO Min. SS

If you select [ISO AUTO] or [ISO AUTO] under [Multi Frame NR] when the shooting mode is P
(Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO
sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while
also preventing camera shake.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.

Menu item details

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can
prevent camera shake and subject blurring.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can
shoot images with less noise.
1/4000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast],
[Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.

Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO
AUTO], in order to shoot with an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the
speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].

In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-
syncing speed of 1/160 seconds.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash] or [Wireless].
(The minimum shutter speed is limited to the speed automatically determined by the camera.)
[106] Shooting Using the zoom

The zoom features available with this product

The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various
zoom features. The icon displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom
feature.

When a power zoom lens is mounted:

When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:

1. Optical zoom range

Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.

When a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed.
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider is fixed at the left
end of the zoom bar while the zoom position is in the optical zoom range (displayed as
x1.0).
2. Smart Zoom range ( )
Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an
image (only when the image size is [M] or [S]).

3. Clear Image Zoom range ( )

Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. When you set [Zoom Setting]
to [On:ClearImage Zoom] or [On:Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.

4. Digital Zoom range ( )

You can magnify images using an image process. When you set [Zoom Setting] to
[On:Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.

Note
The default setting for the [Zoom Setting] is [Optical zoom only].

The default setting for the [ Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [ Image Size]
to [M] or [S].

Zoom functions other than the optical zoom are not available when shooting in the following
situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
[ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting
 You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.

When a power zoom lens is mounted, you cannot use [Zoom] under MENU. If you enlarge image
past the optical zoom range, the product automatically switches to another [Zoom] function than the
optical zoom.

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, [Metering Mode] is fixed to [Multi].

When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the following functions are not available:
Smile/Face Detect.
Lock-on AF
Auto Obj. Framing

To use another zoom function than the optical zoom for movies, assign [Zoom] to the desired button
using [Custom Key(Shoot.)].

[107] Shooting Using the zoom

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of
the optical zoom.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → [On:ClearImage Zoom] or

[On:Digital Zoom].

2 When a power zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever or the zoom ring of the
zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

When you exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom, the camera automatically
switches to another zoom than the optical zoom.

3 When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom] → desired value.

Press the center of the control wheel to exit.

You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired button by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)].
[108] Shooting Using the zoom

Zoom Setting

You can select the zoom setting of the product.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [
Image Size] to [M] or [S].
On:ClearImage Zoom:
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom,
the product magnifies images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate
significantly.
On:Digital Zoom:
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to
the largest scale. However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does
not deteriorate.

[109] Shooting Using the zoom

About zoom scale

The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the
selected image size.

When [ Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]

Zoom Setting
Image
Size Optical zoom only (including smart On:ClearImage On:Digital
zoom) Zoom Zoom

L: 24M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×

 M: 12M Approx. 1.4× Approx. 2.8× Approx. 5.7×

S: 6.0M Approx. 2× Approx. 4× Approx. 8×

[110] Shooting Using the zoom

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only
with power zoom lenses that support this function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Left(W)/Right(T):
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed
rotation.
Right(W)/Left(T):
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed
rotation.

[111] Shooting White balance

White Balance

Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white.
Use this function when the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when
you want to change the color tones on purpose for photographic expression.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto/ Daylight/ Shade/ Cloudy/ Incandescent/ Fluor.:
Warm White/ Fluor.: Cool White/ Fluor.: Day White/ Fluor.: Daylight/
Flash/ Underwater Auto: When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the
product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light source (preset white balance). When
you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color
Compensation) filters for photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
Custom Setup:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.

Select a memorized custom white balance number.

Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as
required by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket]
shooting.

or is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].

Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]

If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be
obtained because of the characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash
or select [Custom Setup].

[112] Shooting White balance

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent
light when [White Balance] is set to [Auto].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
 Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm
atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

[113] Shooting White balance

Capturing a basic white color in [Custom Setup] mode

In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended
to use the custom white balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness.
You can
register 3 settings.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → [Custom Setup].

2 Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the circle located in the center
of the screen, and then press the center of the control wheel.

After the shutter sound beeps, the calibrated values (Color Temperature and Color Filter)
are displayed.

3 Select a registration number using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center.

The monitor returns to the recording information display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by
the another setting.

Note
The message [Custom WB Error] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example
when the subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that
you set the white balance again. When an error value is set, the indicator turns orange on the
recording information display. The indicator will be displayed in white when the set value is in the
expected range.

If you use a flash when capturing a shot, the custom white balance will be registered with the flash
light. Shoot images with a flash when recalling a setting registered with the flash.
[114] Shooting Selecting an effect mode

Creative Style

Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and
sharpness for each image style. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you
like with this function, unlike with [Scene Selection], where the product adjusts the exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].

2 Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom sides of the control
wheel.

3 To adjust (Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired

item using the right/left sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.

4 When selecting [Style Box], move to the right side using the right side of the control
wheel, and then select the desired style.

You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.
 (A): Displayed only when Style Box is selected

Menu item details

Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and
subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral:
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also
suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear:
For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant
light.
Deep:
For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of
the subject.
Light:
For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light
ambience.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery.
Distant landscapes also stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene:
The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves:
For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Style Box):
Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side ( )) to register preferred
settings. Then select the desired settings using the right button.
You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]

[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as
[Standard] and [Landscape], and for each [Style Box] to which you can register preferred
settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value
using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and
the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the
color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated,
and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.

Note
[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].

When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.

[115] Shooting Selecting an effect mode

Picture Effect

Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

 Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and
white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Soft Focus:
Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
HDR Painting:
Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Miniature:
Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused
considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
Watercolor:
Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
Illustration:
Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.

Hint
You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes
[Toy Camera] less effective.

When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject
or shooting conditions.

You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the
image after the shot. Also, you cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You
cannot use these effects with movies.
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
 [Rich-tone Mono.]
[Miniature]
[Watercolor]
[Illustration]

In the case of [HDR Painting] and [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot.
Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred,
you may not be able to obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation, appear
on the recorded image to inform you of this situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image
carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

This function is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]

When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.

[116] Shooting Selecting an effect mode

Soft Skin Effect (still image)

Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Soft Skin Effect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the [ Soft Skin Effect] function.
On:
Uses the [ Soft Skin Effect].

Hint
When [ Soft Skin Effect] is set to [On], you can select the effect level.
Select the effect level by
pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.

Note
[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [ Quality] is [RAW].
 [ Soft Skin Effect] is not available for RAW images when the [ Quality] is [RAW & JPEG].

[117] Shooting Selecting an effect mode

Auto Obj. Framing (still image)

When this product detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are
tracked by [Lock-on AF], the product automatically trims the image into an appropriate
composition, and then saves it. Both the original and the trimmed images are saved. The
trimmed image is recorded in the same size as the original image size.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Auto Obj. Framing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not trim images.
Auto:
Automatically trims images into an appropriate composition.

Note
[ Auto Obj. Framing] is not available when the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama],
[Movie], or [Movie/S&Q Motion], or when [Scene Selection] is set to [Hand-held Twilight], [Sports
Action], or [Anti Motion Blur].

The trimmed image may not be the best possible composition, depending on the shooting conditions.

[ Auto Obj. Framing] cannot be set when [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].

[ Auto Obj. Framing] is not available in the following situations.

[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], [Self-timer(Cont)], [Cont. Bracket], [Single Bracket], [WB
bracket], or [DRO Bracket].
The ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR].
[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom
When shooting in Manual Focus mode
[Picture Effect] is set to [Soft Focus], [HDR Painting], [Rich-tone Mono.], [Miniature], [Watercolor],
or [Illustration].
[118] Shooting Selecting an effect mode

Color Space (still image)

The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color
reproduction is called “color space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose
of the image.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.

Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as
when you intend to print out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is
vivid green or red, Adobe RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”

Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color
space. Images may not be printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers
that do not support Adobe RGB.

When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant
devices, the images will be displayed with low saturation.

[119] Shooting Shutter settings

Release w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to
an astronomical telescope, etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.

Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such
as the lens of an astronomical telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it
on the recorded image.

[120] Shooting Shutter settings

Release w/o Card

Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.

Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.

The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.

[121] Shooting Shutter settings

Silent Shooting (still image)

You can shoot images without the shutter sound.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Silent Shooting] → desired setting.

Menu item details
On:
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.
Off:
[ Silent Shooting] is deactivated.

Note
Use the [ Silent Shooting] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration
to the privacy and portrait rights of the subject.

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.

When shooting still images using the [ Silent Shooting] function with low ISO sensitivity, if you
point the camera at a very bright light source, high intensity areas on the monitor may be recorded in
darker tones.

When the power is turned off, the shutter sound may beep in rare occasions. This is not a
malfunction.

Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur.

If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from
other cameras or fluorescent lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.

If you want to turn off the beep that sounds when the subject is in focus or the self-timer operates,
set [Audio signals] to [Off].

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the shutter sound may beep under the following
circumstances:
[White Balance] is set to [Custom Setup]
[Face Registration]

You cannot select [ Silent Shooting] when the mode dial is set to other than P/A/S/M.

When [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Picture Profile
Long Exposure NR
e-Front Curtain Shut.
S. Auto Img. Extract.
BULB shooting
Multi Frame NR

When [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], only [Continuous Shooting: Lo] is available for [Cont.
Shooting].

When shooting using a function downloaded from PlayMemories Camera Apps, [ Silent Shooting]
is canceled. To reactivate [ Silent Shooting], first launch an application, then select MENU → [
Silent Shooting] ([ Silent Shooting] cannot be used with some applications).

After you turn the camera on, the time in which you can start recording is extended by approximately
0.5 seconds.
[122] Shooting Shutter settings

e-Front Curtain Shut.

The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between shutter releases.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [e-Front Curtain Shut.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Off:
Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.

Note
When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred
area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. In such cases, set this function to
[Off].

When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set
this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image
brightness will be uneven.

When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on
the shooting environment. In such cases, set [e-Front Curtain Shut.] to [Off].

[123] Shooting Reducing blur

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses [SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [SteadyShot].
We recommend that you set [Off] when using a tripod.

[124] Shooting Reducing blur

SteadyShot Settings

You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → [On].

2 [SteadyShot Settings] → [SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the
attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.].
(8mm-1000mm)
Check the focal-length index (A) and set the focal-length.

Note
The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after
you point the camera towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way
down without stopping halfway.

When using a tripod, make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any
malfunction when shooting.

[SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[SteadyShot] is

set to [Off].

When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does
not work correctly. Set [SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [SteadyS. Focal Len.] to match the
lens you are using. The current set value of the SteadyShot focal length will display to the side of
.
 When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [SteadyShot Adjust.]
to [Manual] and set the focal length.

When you set [SteadyShot] to [On]/[Off], the SteadyShot settings of the camera and lens switch at
the same time.

If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that
switch on the lens. You cannot switch the settings using the camera.

[125] Shooting Lens compensation

Lens Comp.: Shading Comp.

Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → [Shading Comp.] → desired

setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Compensates for darker corners of the screen automatically.
Off:
Does not compensate for darker corners of the screen.

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

The amount of light around the edges may not be corrected, depending on the lens type.

[126] Shooting Lens compensation

Lens Comp.: Chro. Aber. Comp.

Reduces the color deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → [Chro. Aber. Comp.] → desired

setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
Reduces the color deviation automatically.
Off:
Does not compensate for the color deviation.

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

[127] Shooting Lens compensation

Lens Comp.: Distortion Comp.

Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → [Distortion Comp.] → desired

setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Compensates for distortion of the screen automatically.
Off:
Does not compensate for distortion of the screen.

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].

[128] Shooting Noise reduction

Long Exposure NR (still image)

When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise
reduction is turned on for the duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the
grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.
 1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction
is in progress, a message appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize
the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following
situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].

[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].

The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action], [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti
Motion Blur] is selected.
The ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR].

[ Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]

Depending on the shooting conditions, the camera may not perform noise reduction, even if the
shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer.

[129] Shooting Noise reduction

High ISO NR (still image)

When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more
noticeable when the product sensitivity is high. A message may be displayed during noise
reduction processing; you cannot shoot another image until the message disappears.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
[ High ISO NR] is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]

When [ Quality] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.

[ High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ Quality] is [RAW & JPEG].

[130] Shooting Face detection

Smile/Face Detect.

Detects the faces of your subjects and adjusts the focus, exposure, flash settings and performs
image processing automatically.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Smile/Face Detect.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the [Face Detection] function.
On (Regist. Faces):
Detects the registered face with higher priority using [Face Registration].
On:
Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.
Smile Shutter:
Automatically detects and shoots a smile.
Face Detection frame
When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product
determines that autofocus is enabled, the face detection frame turns white. When you press
the shutter button halfway down, the frame turns green.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the
product automatically selects the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that
face turns white. The face detection frames of other registered faces turn reddish-purple.
Tips for capturing smiles more effectively
Do not cover the eyes with front hair and keep the eyes narrowed.
Do not obscure the face by a hat, masks, sunglasses, etc.
Try to orient the face in front of the product and be as level as possible.
Give a clear smile with an open mouth. The smile is easier to be detected when the teeth
are shown.
If you press the shutter button during Smile Shutter, the product shoots the image. After
shooting, the product returns to Smile Shutter mode.

Hint
When the [Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [Smile Shutter], you can select the Smile Detection
Sensitivity from [On: Slight Smile], [On: Normal Smile] and [On: Big Smile].

Note
You cannot use the Face Detection function with the following functions:
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom
[Sweep Panorama]
[Picture Effect] is set to [Posterization].
When using the [Focus Magnifier] function.
[Scene Selection] is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene], [Sunset].
[ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].

Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.

The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some
conditions.

If the product cannot detect a face, set the Smile Detection Sensitivity.

If you track a face using [Lock-on AF] while executing Smile Shutter function, Smile Detection is
performed only for that face.

[131] Shooting Face detection

Face Registration (New Registration)

If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when
[Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].

2 Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.

3 When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.

Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is
obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

[132] Shooting Face detection

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given
priority. You can change the priority order.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].

2 Select a face to change the order of priority.

3 Select the destination.

[133] Shooting Face detection

Face Registration (Delete)

Deletes a registered face.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].

If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.

Note
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the
data for registered faces from the product, select [Delete All].

[134] Shooting Using the flash

Using flash

In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to
prevent camera-shake.

1 Press the (Flash pop-up) button to pop up the flash.

2 Press the shutter button fully down.

The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.

When you do not use the flash

When not using the flash, press it back into the camera body.

Note
The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the lower part of a recorded
 image may be shaded. Remove the lens hood.

When using the flash, stand 1 m or more away from the subject.

If you fire the flash before the flash unit pops up entirely, it may cause malfunction.

You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light when using a flash
(sold separately) with a LED light.)

When an external flash (sold separately) is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe, the state of the
external flash has priority over the flash setting of this product. You cannot use the internal flash of
this product.

Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe, turn off the
product first. When attaching an accessory, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the
product.

Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltage of 250 V
or more or has the reverse polarity of the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the
screen, depending on the shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the
zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.

The light of the flash may be blocked, depending on the lens.

The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.

For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult
your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

[135] Shooting Using the flash

Red Eye Reduction

When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye
phenomenon.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.

Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and
conditions, such as distance to the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.
[136] Shooting Using the flash

Flash Mode

You can set the flash mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a
clear image of both the subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear
sync shooting allows you to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a
moving car or a walking person.
Wireless:
Using a wireless flash creates a shading effect that gives the subject a more 3D appearance
than when using the camera's flash.
This mode is effective when you attach a remote control-compatible external flash (sold
separately) to the product, and shoot with a wireless flash (sold separately), placed away from
the product.

Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.

Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.

The [Wireless] setting cannot be used with the camera’s built-in flash.
[137] Shooting Using the flash
Flash Comp.

Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes
the amount of flash light only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along
with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.

Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side)
makes the flash level lower.

Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]

The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if
the subject is outside the maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash
effect (- side) may not be visible.

[138] Shooting Using the flash

FEL lock

The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum exposure during
normal flash shooting. You can also set the flash level in advance.
FEL: Flash Exposure Level

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → desired button, then

assign the [FEL Lock toggle] function to the button.

2 Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.
3 Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash amount.

A pre-flash flashes.
The (FEL lock) lights up.

4 Adjust the composition and shoot the image.

When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which the [FEL Lock
toggle] is registered again.

Flashes that support FEL lock

HVL-F60M, HVL-F43M and HVL-F32M can be used as clip-ons, off-camera connected by a
cable, and for wireless flash shooting (controller/remote).
HVL-F20M can be used as a clip-on, off-camera connected with a cable, and for wireless
flash shooting (controller).

Note
The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.

If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is displayed.

When both AE and FEL lock are fixed, lights up.

Hint
By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed down. Also, by
 setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and [FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you can shoot images with the AE locked in
the following situations.
When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].
When the flash cannot go off.

[139] Shooting Using the flash

Wireless flash shooting

There are two ways to use the wireless flash. One way uses a light signal and the other uses a
radio signal to communicate with the flash. The flash attached to the camera must be the
controller in light signal flash shooting and a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) is
required for radio signal wireless flash shooting. For details on how to set each method, refer to
the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

1 Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless
Radio Commander.

In light signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → [Wireless].

3 Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the
Wireless Radio Receiver (sold separately).

Press the AEL button on the camera to perform a test flashing.

Setting of the AEL button

We recommend that you set MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] →
[AEL Button] to [AEL hold] when performing wireless flash shooting.

Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of
another camera. If this occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the
channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

Two flashes (a controller and an off-camera flash) are required for light signal wireless flash
shooting.
 HVL-F20M can only be used as the controller.

[140] Recording movies

Shooting movies

You can record movies by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button.

1 Press the MOVIE button to start recording.

Since the [MOVIE Button] is set to [Always] in the default setting, movie recording can
be started from any shooting mode.

2 Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Hint
You can assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key. MENU → (Camera
Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → set the function to the preferred key.

When you want to specify the area to be focused on, set the area using [Focus Area].

To keep the focus on a face, arrange the composition so that the focus area frame and face
detection frame overlap, or set the [Focus Area] to [Wide].

You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button halfway down. (The
sound of auto focus operation may be recorded in some cases.)

To adjust the shutter speed and aperture value to the desired settings, set the shooting mode to
(Movie/S&Q Motion).

The following settings for still image shooting are applied to the movie shooting:
White Balance
Creative Style
Metering Mode
Smile/Face Detect.
 D-Range Opt.
Lens Comp.

You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while
shooting movies.

While shooting movies, the recorded image can be output without the shooting information display by
setting [HDMI Info. Display] to [Off].

Note
The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.

You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] →
[Off].

When shooting, the sound of the shoulder strap hooks (triangular hook) could be recorded,
depending on the situation used.

To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded during movie recording when a
power zoom lens is used, we recommend recording movies using the zoom lever. When you move
the zoom lever, place your finger lightly on the lever and operate it without flicking.

The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel
that the camera is hot. This is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may
appear. In such cases, turn the camera off and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.

When the icon appears, the temperature of the camera is too high.

For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When
movie recording is finished, you can restart recording by pressing the MOVIE button again.
Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the temperature of the product or the
battery.

When the mode dial is set to (Movie/S&Q Motion) or when shooting movies, you cannot select
[Lock-on AF] for [Focus Area].

In [Program Auto] mode when shooting movies, the aperture value and the shutter speed will be set
automatically and cannot be changed. For that reason, the shutter speed may become fast in a
bright environment, and the motion of the subject may not record smoothly. By changing the
exposure mode and adjusting the aperture value and the shutter speed, the motion of the subject
can be recorded smoothly.

When ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR], [ISO AUTO] will be set temporarily.

In movie shooting mode, the following settings cannot be set in [Picture Effect]. When a movie
recording starts, [Off] will be set temporarily.
Soft Focus
HDR Painting
Rich-tone Mono.
Miniature
Watercolor
Illustration

If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting a movie at low ISO
sensitivity, the highlighted area in the image may be recorded as a black area.

If the display mode of the monitor is set to [For viewfinder], the display mode will switch to [Display
All Info.] when movie shooting starts.
 Use PlayMemories Home when importing XAVC S movies, AVCHD movies, and MP4 movies to a
computer.

[141] Recording movies

Movie recording formats

The following movie recording formats are available with this camera.

What is XAVC S?
Records movies in high definition such as 4K by converting them into MP4 movies using the
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec. MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is capable of compressing images with higher
efficiency. You can record high-quality images while reducing the amount of data.

XAVC S/AVCHD recording format

XAVC S 4K:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps or approx. 60 Mbps
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps, approx. 60 Mbps, or approx. 50 Mbps

Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD with larger amounts of data.
AVCHD:
Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (maximum), approx. 24 Mbps (maximum) or approx. 17 Mbps
(average)
The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other than
computers.
Bit rate is the amount of data processed within a given period of time.

[142] Recording movies

File Format (movie)

Selects the movie file format.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

XAVC S 4K:
Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate.
Audio: LPCM
One of the following kinds of memory card is needed to record movies with [ File Format]
set to [XAVC S 4K]:

Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo

Movies cannot be recorded in 100 Mbps or more.

SDHC / SDXC / microSDHC / microSDXC memory card (SD Speed Class 10, or UHS
Speed Class U1 or faster)
UHS Speed Class U3 is required to record at 100 Mbps or more.

[HDMI Info. Display] temporarily switches to [Off] when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S
4K].
Images will not appear on the monitor of the camera if you record movies while the camera
is connected to an HDMI device with [ File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K].
[Smile/Face Detect.] and [Center Lock-on AF] are temporarily set to [Off] when the camera
is connected to an HDMI device with [ File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K].
[Smile/Face Detect.], [Center Lock-on AF] and [ REC Control] are temporarily set to [Off]
when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Dual Video REC] is set to [On]. Even if
the camera is connected to an HDMI device, images will not be displayed on that device
while movie recording is in progress.

XAVC S HD:
Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate.
Audio: LPCM
One of the following kinds of memory card is needed to record movies with [ File Format]
set to [XAVC S HD]:
Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo

Movies cannot be recorded in 100 Mbps or more.

SDHC / SDXC / microSDHC / microSDXC memory card (SD Speed Class10, or UHS
Speed Class U1 or faster)

UHS Speed Class U3 is required to record at 100 Mbps or more.

AVCHD:
Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV.
Audio: Dolby Digital
MP4:
Records MP4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets,
web uploads, email attachments, etc.
Audio: AAC

Hint
You can save images to a computer or copy them to a disc compatible with your playback device
 using the PlayMemories Home software.

Note
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the
movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.

When [ File Format] is set to [MP4], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie
file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop automatically.

[143] Recording movies

Record Setting (movie)

Selects the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-
rate, the higher the image quality.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
Records high-definition movies by converting them into the MP4 file format using the MPEG-4
AVC/H.264 codec.

Bit-rate
Frame Rate
60 Mbps 100 Mbps

30p/25p 30p 60M/25p 60M 30p 100M/25p 100M

24p 24p 60M * 24p 100M *

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]

Records high-definition movies by converting them into the MP4 file format using the MPEG-4
AVC/H.264 codec.

Bit-rate
Frame Rate
50 Mbps 60 Mbps 100 Mbps
 120p/100p ― 120p 60M/100p 60M 120p 100M/100p 100M

60p/50p 60p 50M /50p 50M ― ―

30p/25p 30p 50M /25p 50M ― ―

24p 24p 50M * ― ―

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]

60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or
50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode with Dolby Digital audio and
in the AVCHD format.

24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible

devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode with Dolby
Digital audio and in the AVCHD format.
60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible
devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode with Dolby
Digital audio and in the AVCHD format.

Frame Bit-rate
Rate
17 Mbps 24 Mbps 28 Mbps

60i 17M(FH) /50i 60i 24M(FX) /50i

60i/50i ―
17M(FH) 24M(FX)

60p 28M(PS) /50p

60p/50p ― ―
28M(PS)

24p 17M(FH) /25p 24p 24M(FX) /25p

24p/25p ―
17M(FH) 24M(FX)

When [ File Format] is set to [MP4]

Movies are recorded in the MPEG-4 format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-
compatible devices), approximately 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices),
approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices), or approximately 25 frames/sec
(for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode with AAC audio and in the MP4 format.

Frame Bit-rate
Rate
6 Mbps 16 Mbps 28 Mbps

1080/60p 28M
60p/50p ― ―
/1080/50p 28M
 720/30p 6M 1080/30p 16M
30p/25p ―
/720/25p 6M /1080/25p 16M

Note
Movies recorded with the [60p 28M(PS) ]/[50p 28M(PS) ]/[60i 24M(FX) ]/[50i 24M(FX)
]/[24p 24M(FX) ]/[25p 24M(FX) ] as the [ Record Setting] are converted by
PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. You cannot create a disc in the
original image quality. This conversion can take a long time. If you want to keep the original image
quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.

To play back 60p/50p/24p/25p movies on a TV, the TV must be compatible with the 60p/50p/24p/25p
format. If the TV is not compatible with the 60p/50p/24p/25p format, 60p/50p/24p/25p movies will be
output as 60i/50i movies.

[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]

The angle of view will be narrower under the following conditions:

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set to [30p]/[25p]
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

[144] Recording movies

S&Q Settings

You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or
record a long-term phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For
example, you can record an intense sports scene, the moment when a bird starts to fly, a
blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky. Sound will not be recorded.

1 Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).

2 Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[Movie/S&Q Motion]→ and select the

desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto,
Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).

3 Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired
 settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].

4 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Record Setting:
Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate.
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [
Frame Rate].
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Record Setting
Frame Rate
24p 30p 60p

120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower -

60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick

15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick

8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick

4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick

2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick

1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL

Record Setting
Frame Rate
25p 50p

100fps 4 times slower -

50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed

25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick

 12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick

6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick

3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick

2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick

1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick

When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set [ Record Setting] to
[60p]/[50p].

Note
In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the
proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a
higher value.

For an estimation of recordable time, refer to "Recordable movie times."

The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for [ Frame Rate] and [
Record Setting].

The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format.

During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.

[Dual Video REC]
[TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]
[ TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]
[ 4K Output Sel.]

[145] Recording movies

Dual Video REC

Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie
and an MP4 movie.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dual Video REC] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
An XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie, are recorded
simultaneously.
Off:
The [Dual Video REC] function is not used.

Note
When [ Record Setting] for an XAVC S movie is set to [60p]/[50p] or [120p]/[100p], [ Record
Setting] for an AVCHD movie is set to [60p]/[50p], or [ File Format] is set to [MP4], [Dual Video
REC] is set to [Off].

If you select [Date View] in [View Mode] when playing back movies, XAVC S movies and MP4
movies, or AVCHD movies and MP4 movies are displayed side-by-side.

[146] Recording movies

Audio Recording

Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the
sounds of the lens and the camera operating.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.

[147] Recording movies

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.

Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.

[148] Recording movies

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].

2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.

Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level.
Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower
volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make the sound easier to hear.

Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.

[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.

[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

 The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the
(microphone) terminal input.

[149] Recording movies

Wind Noise Reduct.

Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from
the built-in microphone.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.

Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be
recorded with too low volume.

When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [On] does not function.

[150] Recording movies

Picture Profile

Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,”
refer to http://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.

Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and
[Detail]. When setting these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust
them while observing the picture on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to

 change.

2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press
in the center.

Using the preset of the picture profile

The default settings [PP1] through [PP9] for movies have been set in advance in the camera
based on various shooting conditions.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.

PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].

Items of the picture profile

Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)

Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a
relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to
HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in
black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3]. The contrast in dark parts is
lower and the contrast in bright parts is higher than for [Movie].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-
Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will
be processed after shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on
the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.

Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black
stretch))

Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting
signals in high intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
When selecting [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [Cine3], [Cine4], [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-Log3] in
[Gamma], [Knee] is set to [Off] if [Mode] is set to [Auto]. To use functions in [Knee], set [Mode]
to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode].

Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)

Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))

Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when
combined with ITU709 gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting.
Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after
shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color
space that can easily be converted for digital cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting.
Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.

Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors
and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting
value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative
side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)

Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are
set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the
vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W).
(Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit
 level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening
level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy].

To Reset the picture profile to the default setting

You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile
settings at once.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset].

Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you change the
shooting mode.

If you print RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth

When the [ Record Setting] is [120p 100M]/[100p 100M] or [120p 60M]/[100p 60M], [Black
Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted.

If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.

There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting
the lens compensation to [Off].

When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using
other gammas. If the noise still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by
shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic range becomes narrower accordingly when
you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by test shooting
when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.

Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup.
In this case, perform custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3]
first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] gamma.

Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.

If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set], [Knee] is set to [Off].

S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this
camera's S-Gamut setting does not support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve
a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
[151] Recording movies

Gamma Disp. Assist

Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of
the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may
be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma
can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back
movies on the camera's monitor/viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Gamma Disp. Assist].

2 Select the desired setting using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not apply [Gamma Disp. Assist].
Auto:
Displays movies with an [S-Log2→709(800%)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is
[S-Log2], and with an [S-Log3→709(800%)] effect when the gamma is set to [S-Log3].
S-Log2→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).

Note
When [Gamma Disp. Assist] is set to [Auto] during playback, the picture is displayed based on the
current gamma setting in [Picture Profile] instead of auto-detecting the gamma value of the movie.

[Gamma Disp. Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the
camera.

[152] Recording movies

Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the
subject is dark.
 1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shut.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark
locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in
dark locations.
Off:
Does not use [ Auto Slow Shut.]. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is
selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Note
[ Auto Slow Shut.] does not function in the following situations:
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)

When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]

[153] Recording movies

AF drive speed (movie)

You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF drive speed] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Fast:
Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as
sports.
Normal:
Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow:
Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject
to be focused is changed.
[154] Recording movies

AF Track Sens (movie)

You can set the AF sensitivity in movie mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF Track Sens]→desired setting.

Menu item details

Responsive:
Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject
is moving quickly.
Standard:
Sets the AF sensitivity to normal. This mode is useful when there are obstacles in front of the
subject or in crowded places.

[155] Recording movies

TC/UB Settings

The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to
movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.

Menu item details

TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29
* When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23
frames.
When [50i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24

3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the
control wheel.

How to reset the time code

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00).
You can also reset the time code (00:00:00:00) using the RMT-VP1K remote commander (sold
separately).

How to set the user bit (UB Preset)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the
control wheel.

How to reset the user bit

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].

2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).

How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format*1)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].

DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will
occur during extended periods of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately
29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make the time code and actual time equal. In drop
frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time code without
this correction is called non-drop frame.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.
How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].

Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is
recorded sequentially from the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera
operation.

The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the
time code advances in [Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.

How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].

Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the
new time code consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run]
mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.

[156] Recording movies

TC/UB Disp. Switch

Allows you to display the time code (TC) and user bit (UB) of a movie by pressing the key to
which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] function has been assigned.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)]/[Custom Key(PB)] →

assign the [TC/UB Disp. Switch] function to the desired key.

2 Press the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] is assigned.

Each time you press the key, the monitor display will switch from the movie recording
time counter → time code (TC) → user bit (UB), in that order.
[157] Recording movies

MOVIE Button

Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [MOVIE Button] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Always:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
Movie Mode Only:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to
[Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.

[158] Recording movies

Marker Display (movie)

Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on the monitor or the
viewfinder while shooting movies.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.

Note
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to (Movie/S&Q Motion) or when shooting
movies.

You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].

The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)
[159] Recording movies

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
[Off]/[On]
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a
general household TV.
[Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or
perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/[On]

Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.

Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.

[160] Recording movies

4K Output Sel. (movie)

You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to
4K-compatible external recording/playback devices, etc.

1 Turn the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).

 2 Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.

3 MENU → (Setup) → [ 4K Output Sel.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s
memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the
camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p) :
Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the
camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p) *:

Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the
camera’s
memory card.
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.

Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible
device.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p) ] or [HDMI Only(25p) ] is set, [HDMI Info. Display]
will temporarily be set to [Off].

A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-motion/quick-motion

shooting.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p) ] or [HDMI Only(25p) ] is set, the counter does not
move forward (the actual recording time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an
external recording/playback device.

When the camera is connected using an HDMI cable with [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], or
when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Dual Video REC] is set to [On], the following
functions are not available.
[Smile/Face Detect.]
[Lock-on AF] under [Focus Area]
[Center Lock-on AF]
[Eye AF]
[161] Viewing Viewing images
Playing back still images

Plays back the recorded images.

1 Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.

2 Select the image with the control wheel.

Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An
image that is not registered in the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play
back images shot using other devices, register those images to the image database file using MENU
→ (Setup) → [Recover Image DB].

If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon
indicating that data is being written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions
are not available.

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move
the magnified position on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to other than [Off] beforehand.

[162] Viewing Viewing images

Enlarging an image being played back (Playback

zoom)

Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.

1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the button.

Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale.

By rotating the control dial, you can switch to the previous or next image while keeping
the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during
shooting. If the focus location information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in
on the center of the image.
 2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of
the control wheel.

3 Press the MENU button, or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.

Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move
the magnified position on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to other than [Off] beforehand.

Note
You cannot enlarge movies.

[163] Viewing Viewing images

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display

Rotation)

Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the
orientation of the camera.
Manual:
A portrait image is displayed as a vertical image. If you have set the image orientation using the
[Rotate] function, the image will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Always displays in landscape orientation.
[164] Viewing Viewing images

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Rotates a recorded still image counter-clockwise.

1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Rotate].

2 Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned
off.

Note
You cannot rotate the movies.

You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.

When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original
orientation depending on the software.

[165] Viewing Viewing images

Playing back panoramic images

The product automatically scrolls a panoramic image from end to end.

1 Press the (Playback) button to switch to playback mode.

2 Select the panoramic image to be played back using the control wheel and press the
center to start playback.
 To pause playback, press the center again.
To scroll panoramic images manually, press the top/bottom/right/left during pause.
To return to the display of the entire image, press the MENU button.

Note
Panoramic images shot using other products may be displayed in a different size from the actual
size, or may not scroll correctly.

[166] Viewing Viewing images

Playing back movies

Plays back the recorded movies.

1 Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.

2 Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of
the control wheel to start playback.

Available operations during movie playback

You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side
of the control wheel.

: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
 : Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Photo Capture
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel

Hint
“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the
previous frame” are available during pause.

Movie files recorded using other products may not be able to be playable on this camera.

[167] Viewing Viewing images

Volume Settings

Sets the sound volume for movie playback.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.

Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation
panel, then adjust the volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

[168] Viewing Viewing images

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause
the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting
still images, and save them as still images.

1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.

2 MENU → (Playback) → select [Photo Capture].

 3 Play back the movie and pause it.

4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback,
displays the next frame, and displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.

5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.

The scene is saved as a still image.

[169] Viewing Viewing images

Playing back images on the image index screen

(Image Index)

You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.

1 Press the (Image Index) button while the image is being played back.

2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or
turning the control wheel.

To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

12 Images/30 Images

To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.

To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the
calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing the center. In addition, you can switch
View Mode by selecting an icon.

[170] Viewing Viewing images

Switching between still images and movies (View

Mode)

Sets the View Mode (image display method).

1 MENU → (Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
Folder View(MP4):
Displays only MP4-format movies.
AVCHD View:
Displays only AVCHD-format movies.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.

[171] Viewing Viewing images

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Automatically plays back images continuously.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.

 2 Select [Enter].

Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product
exits the slideshow when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.

Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control
wheel.

You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].

[172] Viewing Protecting data

Protecting images (Protect)

Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The mark is displayed on

protected images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies or cancels the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The mark
is displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the
mark.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images in the selected date range.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected date range.

Note
The menu items that can be selected differ depending on the [View Mode] setting.

[173] Viewing Designating images for printing (DPOF)

Specify Printing (Specify Printing)

You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later.
The (print order) icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print
Order Format.”
DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this
setting after printing.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again and delete the mark.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select several images in the date range or in the
folder, select the check box of the date or the folder.
(3) MENU → [OK].

Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the
printer.

Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
RAW images

The number of images to be printed cannot be specified.

 Some printers do not support the date print function.

[174] Viewing Deleting images

Deleting a displayed image

You can delete an image displayed. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it.
Confirm the image to be deleted beforehand.

1 Display the image you want to delete.

2 Press the (Delete) button.

3 Select [Delete] using the control wheel.

Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.

[175] Viewing Deleting images

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore
it. Confirm the image to be deleted beforehand.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The mark is
displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the
mark.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images in the selected date range.

Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.

To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing
the following procedure:
(Image Index) button → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired
folder or date using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.

The menu items that can be selected differ depending on the [View Mode] setting.

[176] Viewing Deleting images

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the delete
confirmation screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.

[177] Viewing Viewing images on a TV

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and an HD
TV equipped with an HDMI jack are required.

1 Turn off both this product and the TV.

2 Connect the HDMI micro terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an
HDMI cable (sold separately).

3 Turn on the TV and switch the input.

4 Turn on this product.

Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.

5 Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the (Playback) button.

“BRAVIA” Sync
By connecting this product to a TV that supports “BRAVIA” Sync using an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can operate this product's playback functions with the TV remote control.

1. After performing the steps above to connect this camera to a TV, select MENU →
(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [On].
2. Press the SYNC MENU button on the TV remote control, and select the desired mode.
If you connect this camera to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
Only TVs that support “BRAVIA” Sync can provide SYNC MENU operations. For details,
refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the
product is connected to another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU
→ (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

Hint
This product is compatible with the PhotoTV HD standard. If you connect Sony PhotoTV HD-
compatible devices using an HDMI cable (sold separately), the TV is set to the image quality suitable
for viewing still images, and a whole new world of photos can be enjoyed in breathtaking high quality.

You can connect this product to Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible devices with a USB terminal using the
supplied micro USB cable.

The PhotoTV HD allows for a highly-detailed, photo-like expression of subtle textures and colors.

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.

Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.

Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not
output video or audio.

Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.

Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI micro terminal of the product and the HDMI
jack of the TV.

When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording
device. In such cases, set [ TC Output] to [Off].

If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings]
→ [HDMI Resolution] → [2160p/1080p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.

During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or
change the movie to a different frame rate, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.

[178] Customizing the camera Registering frequently used functions

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to register up to 2 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4
(M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ / Memory] → desired number.

3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are
displayed on the menu of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed

To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.

Program Shift cannot be registered.

[179] Customizing the camera Assigning selected functions to the button

Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

You can assign a desired function to a desired key.

Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, if you
assign [Eye AF] to [Center Button] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)], you can easily recall [Eye AF]
simply by pressing the center of the control wheel while shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] or [Custom Key(PB)].

2 Select the key to which you want to assign the function on the selection screen.
 The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and
[Custom Key(PB)].

You can assign the desired functions to the following keys.

1. Custom Button 2
2. Custom Button 1
3. AF/MF Button/AEL Button
4. Fn/ Button
5. Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
6. Custom Button 3

You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However,
some lenses do not have a focus hold button.

3 Select the function to be assigned.

The functions that can be assigned differ depending on the keys.

[180] Customizing the camera Assigning selected functions to the button

Function Menu Set.

You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.] → set a function to the

desired location.

The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
[181] Customizing the camera Customizing the functions of the dial

Dial/Wheel Setup

You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Setup] → desired setting.

Menu item details

SS F/no.:
You can change the shutter speed using the control wheel, and change the aperture value
using the control dial.
F/no. SS:
You can change the aperture value using the control wheel, and change the shutter speed
using the control dial.

Note

[Dial/Wheel Setup] is enabled when the shooting mode is set to “M.”

[182] Customizing the camera Customizing the functions of the dial

Dial / Wheel Lock

You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function)
button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial / Wheel Lock] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Lock:
Locks the control dial and control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control dial or control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function)
button.

Hint
 You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

[183] Customizing the camera Checking images before/after recording

Auto Review

You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the
display time for Auto Review.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.

Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time.
If you perform a magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the
magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.

Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be
displayed temporarily, followed by the image after processing.

The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.

[184] Customizing the camera Checking images before/after recording

Aperture Preview

While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview] function, the
aperture is stepped down to the set aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to
shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → set the [Aperture

Preview] function to the desired key.
 2 Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] was assigned.

Hint
Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject may be defocused if you
select a brighter aperture. We recommend that you adjust the focus again.

[185] Customizing the camera Checking images before/after recording

Shot. Result Preview

While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the
image preview with the DRO, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied.
Check the shooting result preview before shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → set the [Shot. Result

Preview] function to the desired key.

2 Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] was
assigned.

Hint
The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you have set are reflected on
the image for [Shot. Result Preview], but some effects cannot be previewed depending on the
shooting settings. Even in that case, the settings you have selected will be applied to the images you
shoot.

[186] Customizing the camera Checking images before/after recording

Live View Display

Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white
balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect] on the screen.
 1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Setting Effect ON:
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying
all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the
results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative
Style], or [Picture Effect]. When this setting is used, you can easily check the image
composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.

When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the icon is displayed on the Live View screen.

Note
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Movie/S&Q Motion]
[Scene Selection]

When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be
the same as that of the displayed Live View.

Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some
shutter speed settings. When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will
be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the composition.

[187] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

Grid Line

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the
composition of images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.

Menu item details
Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-
balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable
to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated
images.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.

[188] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

FINDER/MONITOR

Sets the method for switching the display between Electronic Viewfinder and the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you look into the Electronic Viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched
to the Electronic Viewfinder automatically.
Viewfinder(Manual):
The screen is turned off and the image is displayed only in the Electronic Viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The Electronic Viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the screen.

Hint
You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key.

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to the

preferred key.

To turn off automatic switching of the display using the eye sensor, set [FINDER/MONITOR] to
[Viewfinder(Manual)] or [Monitor(Manual)].
[189] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

Deactivate Monitor

When you press the key to which the [Deactivate Monitor] function has been assigned, the
monitor turns black, and the screen display is locked to [No Disp. Info.].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → set the [Deactivate

Monitor] function to the desired key.

2 Press the key to which [Deactivate Monitor] is assigned.

To return to the display, press the key to which [Deactivate Monitor] is assigned again.

Note
Even if you perform [Deactivate Monitor], the backlight of monitor remains on. To turn off the
backlight, switch the monitor mode to viewfinder mode using the [FINDER/MONITOR] function.

[190] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

Monitor Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual]
for indoor shooting.

The monitor brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum brightness will
be [±0].
 When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

The monitor brightness is locked at [-2] when shooting a movie using the Wi-Fi functions.

[191] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

Viewfinder Bright.

When using an electronic viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the electronic
viewfinder according to the surrounding environment.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Adjusts the brightness automatically.
Manual:
Selects the brightness of the electronic viewfinder from the range –2 to +2.

Note
The electronic viewfinder brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum
brightness will be [±0].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

You cannot use the viewfinder while using Wi-Fi functions. The camera will switch to screen display
mode.

When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], [Viewfinder Bright.] cannot be set to [Auto].
[Viewfinder Bright.] can only be set to [Manual].

[192] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

Finder Color Temp.

Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,”
it changes to a colder color.

[193] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

Finder Frame Rate (still image)

Display the subject's movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder
during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) →[ Finder Frame Rate] → desired setting.

This function can be assigned to button of your choice using [Custom Key(Shoot.)].

Menu item details

120fps/100fps:
Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
60fps/50fps:
Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.

Note
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], the resolution of the viewfinder is lowered.

[ Finder Frame Rate] is locked to [60fps]/[50fps] in the following modes:

During playback
During movie shooting
During HDMI connection

[194] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

Display Quality
You can change the display quality.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.

Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.

[195] Customizing the camera Monitor/viewfinder settings

Bright Monitoring

Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the
exposure time, you can check the composition on the viewfinder/monitor even in dark locations
such as under the night sky.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → assign the [Bright

Monitoring] function to the desired key.

2 Press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, then shoot an
image.

The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.

To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the
[Bright Monitoring] function once again.

Note
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and
setting values such as exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is
recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in dark locations.

[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.

 When the camera is turned off.
When the shooting mode is changed from P/A/S/M to a mode that is not P/A/S/M.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.
When [ MF Assist] is executed.
When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.

During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while shooting in dark
locations. Also, because the measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may change.

[196] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format
the card using the camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting
permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on
a computer, etc.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Format].

Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1
to M4).

The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp
is lit up.

Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the
memory card may not be usable depending on the format type.

It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.

You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.

[197] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

File Number

Selects how to assign file numbers to recorded still images and MP4 movies.
 1 MENU → (Setup) → [File Number] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Series:
The product will assign numbers to files sequentially up to "9999" without resetting.
Reset:
The product resets numbers when a file is recorded in a new folder and assigns numbers to
files starting with "0001".
(When the recording folder contains a file, a number one higher than the largest number is
assigned.)

[198] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

Set File Name

You can specify the first three characters of the file name for images you shoot.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Set File Name].

2 Select the entry field for the file name to display a keyboard on the screen, and then
enter three characters of your choice.

Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be entered. However, an underscore cannot be
used as the first character.

The three characters of the file name you specify using [Set File Name] will only be applied to
images you shoot after changing the setting.

[199] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

Display Media Info.

Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number
of recordable still images for the inserted memory card.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Media Info.].

[200] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

Select REC Folder

If [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the
folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

1 MENU→ (Setup)→[Select REC Folder]→desired folder.

Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] is set to [Date Form].

[201] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

New Folder

Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images and MP4 movies. A new
folder is created with a folder number one greater than the largest folder number currently used.
Images are recorded in the newly created folder. A folder for still images and a folder for MP4
movies that have the same number are created at the same time.

1 MENU→ (Setup)→[New Folder].

Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot
images, a new folder may be automatically created.

Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new
folder may be automatically created.
[202] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

Folder Name

Still images are recorded in a folder that is automatically created inside the DCIM folder on the
memory card. You can change the way folder names are assigned.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Folder Name] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard Form:
The folder name form is as follows: folder number + MSDCF.
Example: 100MSDCF
Date Form:
The folder name form is as follows: folder number + Y (the last digit)/MM/DD.
Example: 10060405(Folder number: 100, date: 04/05/2016)

Note
You cannot change the [Folder Name] settings for movies.

[203] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

Recover Image DB

If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In
such cases, the images on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these
problems happen, repair the file using [Recover Image DB].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].

Note
Use a sufficiently charged battery pack. Low battery power during repairing can cause damage to
data.
[204] Customizing the camera Memory card settings

Upload Settings (Eye-Fi)

Sets whether to use the upload function when using an Eye-Fi card (commercially available).
This item appears when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into the product’s memory card slot.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Upload Settings] → desired setting.

2 Set your Wi-Fi network or destination on the Eye-Fi card.

For details, refer to the manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.

3 Insert the Eye-Fi card you have set up into the product, and shoot still images.

Images are transferred to your computer, etc., automatically via the Wi-Fi network.

Menu item details

On:
Enables the upload function.
Off:
Disables the upload function.
Communication status screen display
: Standby. No images are to be sent.
: Upload standby
: Connecting
: Uploading
: Error

Note
Eye-Fi cards are only sold in certain countries/regions.

For more information on Eye-Fi cards, please contact the manufacturer or vendor directly.

Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countries/regions where they were purchased. Use Eye-Fi
cards in accordance with the law of the countries/regions where you purchased the card.

Eye-Fi cards are equipped with a wireless LAN function. Do not insert an Eye-Fi card into the product
in locations in which their use is prohibited, such as on an airplane. When an Eye-Fi card is inserted
into the product, set [Upload Settings] to [Off]. When the upload function is set to [Off], the
indicator will be displayed on the product.

Power save mode will not function during uploading.

If (error) is displayed, remove the memory card and reinsert it, or turn the product off and then
on again. If the indicator appears again, the Eye-Fi card may be damaged.
 Wireless LAN communication may be influenced by other communication devices. If the
communication status is poor, move closer to the access point to be connected.

Third parties may know where you shot the image if you upload the image when [ Loc. Info. Link
Set.] → [Location Info. Link] is set to [On]. To prevent third parties from obtaining your location
information, set [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] to [Off].

This product does not support Eye-Fi “Endless Memory Mode.” Before using an Eye-Fi card, be sure
that “Endless Memory Mode” is turned off.

When you use a new Eye-Fi card for the first time, copy the installation file on the Eye-Fi card to your
computer before formatting the Eye-Fi card.

Update the firmware of an Eye-Fi card to the latest version before using the Eye-Fi card. For details,
refer to the manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.

For details on files you can upload, refer to the manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.

[205] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Audio signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.

Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.

[206] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Tile Menu
Selects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU
button.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Tile Menu] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Always displays the first screen of the menu (Tile Menu).
Off:
Deactivates the Tile Menu display.

[207] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Mode Dial Guide

You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change
the settings available for that shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Mode Dial Guide] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the Mode Dial Guide.
Off:
Does not display the Mode Dial Guide.

[208] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Pwr Save Start Time

Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing
operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an
operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Pwr Save Start Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details
30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec

Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.

When using a lens with power zoom, the lens is retracted one minute after the product stops
operation if [Pwr Save Start Time] is set to [10 Sec].

The power save function is not activated when power is being supplied via USB, when playing back
slideshows, when recording movies, or when connected to a computer or TV.

[209] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Auto Pwr OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting.
When it is set to [High], you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera
gets hotter than normal.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Auto Pwr OFF Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature at which the camera turns off.
High:
Sets a higher temperature than the standard at which the camera turns off.
Notes when [Auto Pwr OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-
temperature burns.

Continuous recording time for movies when [Auto Pwr OFF Temp.] is set to
[High]
The following values are the continuous times from when the camera starts recording until the
camera stops recording.

Ambient temperature: 20°C (68°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 29 minutes
Ambient temperature: 30°C (86°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 29 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 20 minutes
HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M, not connected via Wi-Fi)
4K: XAVC S 4K (24p 60M, not connected via Wi-Fi)

Note
Even if [Auto Pwr OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the
camera, the recordable time for movies may not change.

[210] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Remote Ctrl

You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2SEC button (2
second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the
Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold
separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Remote Ctrl] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Allows remote commander operation.
Off:
Does not allow remote commander operation.

Note
The lens or lens hood may block the remote sensor that receive the signals. Use the remote
commander in the position from which the signal can reach the product.

When [Remote Ctrl] is set to [On], the product does not switch to power save mode. Set [Off] after
using a remote commander.

[211] Customizing the camera Camera settings

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]

Note
If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video system, a
message telling you that you must reformat the card will appear.
If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another memory card.

When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a
message "Running on NTSC." or "Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.

[212] Customizing the camera Camera settings

HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI
cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or
[2160p/1080p], based on which TV is to be connected.
[213] Customizing the camera Camera settings

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080

60i compatible models)

Set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [ Record Setting] is set to [24p
24M(FX) ], [24p 17M(FH) ], [24p 50M ].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or

[2160p/1080p].

2 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.

Menu item details

60p:
Movies are output as 60p.
24p:
Movies are output as 24p.

Note
Steps 1 and 2 can be set in either order.

When [ Record Setting] is set to other than [24p 24M(FX) ], [24p 17M(FH) ], or [24p 50M
], this setting is canceled, and HDMI video is output according to the [HDMI Resolution] settings.

[214] Customizing the camera Camera settings

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected
using an HDMI cable (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is
displayed on the camera’s monitor.

Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting
information are displayed on the camera’s monitor.

Note
When this product is connected to a 4K-compatible TV, [Off] is selected automatically.

[215] Customizing the camera Camera settings

HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)

Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI
terminal when outputting the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the
time code information as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected
device can then refer to the digital data to recognize the time data.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.

Note
When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording
device. In such cases, set [ TC Output] to [Off].

[216] Customizing the camera Camera settings

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the
recorder/player to start/stop recording using the camera.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop
recording.

Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [ REC Control].

When [ TC Output] is [Off], [ REC Control] is set to [Off].

Even when is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the
settings or status of the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before
use.

[217] Customizing the camera Camera settings

HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI

When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.

2 Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.

The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on
the TV screen.

3 Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.

 4 Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.

Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU
operation differs depending on the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the TV.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product
is connected to another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup)
→ [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

[218] Customizing the camera Camera settings

USB Connection

Selects the appropriate USB connection method for each computer or USB device connected to
this product.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or
other USB devices to be connected.
Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are
connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB
devices.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique
functions are enabled for use.
PC Remote:
Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such
functions as shooting and storing images on the computer.

Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB
Connection] is set to [Auto].

[219] Customizing the camera Camera settings

USB LUN Setting

Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.

[220] Customizing the camera Camera settings

USB Power Supply

Sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a
computer or an USB device.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a
computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a
computer, etc. If you use the supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off] is
selected.

Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.

[221] Customizing the camera Camera settings

PC Remote Settings: Still Img. Save Dest.

Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC
Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the
camera without leaving the camera.
* PC Remote: Uses "Remote Camera Control" to control this product from the computer, including such functions
as shooting and storing images on the computer.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [Still Img. Save Dest.] → desired
setting.

Menu item details

PC Only:
Saves still images only on the computer.
PC+Camera:
Saves still images on the computer and the camera.

Note
During PC Remote shooting, you cannot change settings for [Still Img. Save Dest.]. Adjust the
settings before you start shooting.

If you insert a memory card that is not recordable, you cannot shoot still images even if you select
[PC+Camera].

If you select [PC+Camera] and you have not inserted a memory card into the camera, you cannot
release the shutter even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

While you are playing back still images on the camera, you cannot shoot using PC Remote.

[222] Customizing the camera Camera settings

PC Remote Settings: RAW+J PC Save Img

Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer in PC Remote shooting.
When shooting still images using PC Remote, the application on the computer does not display
the image until the image has been completely transferred. When performing RAW+JPEG
shooting, you can accelerate the display processing speed by transferring only JPEG images
instead of transferring both RAW and JPEG images.
* PC Remote: Uses "Remote Camera Control" to control this product from the computer, including such functions
as shooting and storing images on the computer.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [RAW+J PC Save Img] → desired
setting.

Menu item details

RAW & JPEG:
Transfers both RAW and JPEG files to the computer.
JPEG Only:
Transfers only JPEG files to the computer.
RAW Only:
Transfers only RAW files to the computer.

Note
[RAW+J PC Save Img] can be set only when [ Quality] is set to [RAW & JPEG].

[223] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Language 

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.

[224] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time
or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when
setting the date and time after the first time.
 1 MENU → (Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.

Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the
product for 24 hours or more with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be
worn out. Consult your service facility.

[225] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Area Setting

Sets the area where you are using the product.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.

[226] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Copyright Info

Writes copyright information onto the still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.

2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the
screen. Enter your desired name.
Menu item details
Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], an icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.

Note
You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright].
You can enter up to 46 letters.

A icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.

In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and
[Set Copyright] columns before lending out or handing over your camera.

Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].

[227] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Version

Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this
product’s software are released, etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with software updates is attached.
Also displays the version of the adaptor if an adaptor compatible with software updates is
attached.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Version].

Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery bars) or more.
The use of a sufficiently charged battery or the AC Adaptor (sold separately) is recommended.
[228] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Certification Logo (For some models only)

Displays some of the certification logos for this product.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Certification Logo].

[229] Customizing the camera Camera settings

Demo Mode

The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically
(demonstration), when the camera has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select
[Off].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Demo Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The movie playback demonstration starts automatically if the product is not operated for about
one minute. Only protected AVCHD movies can be played back.
Set the view mode to [AVCHD View], and protect the movie file with the oldest recorded date
and time.
Off:
Does not show the demonstration.

Note
You can set this item only when the product is powered by the AC Adaptor (supplied).

Even if [On] is selected, the product does not start a demonstration if there is no movie file on the
memory card.

When [On] is selected, the product does not switch to power save mode.

[230] Customizing the camera Initializing the camera

Setting Reset

Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded
images are retained.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.

Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.

When you perform [Initialize], downloaded applications on the product may be uninstalled. To use
these applications again, re-install them.

The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize]
is performed.

[231] Using wireless functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone

PlayMemories Mobile

Using the smartphone application PlayMemories Mobile, you can shoot an image while
controlling the camera using a smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to
the smartphone. Download and install the application PlayMemories Mobile from your
smartphone’s application store. If PlayMemories Mobile is already installed on your smartphone,
be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on PlayMemories Mobile, refer to the support page (http://www.sony.net/pmm/).
Note
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to
change without notice.
[232] Using wireless functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone

(NFC One-touch remote)

You can connect this product to an NFC-enabled Android smartphone by touching them
together and then operate the product using the smartphone.

1 Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.

2 Switch this product to shooting mode.

The NFC function is available only when the (N mark) is displayed on the screen.

3 Touch the smartphone to the product.

The smartphone and the product are connected, and PlayMemories Mobile launches.

You can shoot an image by remote control while checking the composition of the
image on the smartphone screen.
Touch the smartphone to the product for 1-2 seconds until PlayMemories Mobile
launches.

About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various
devices, such as mobile phones or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with
just a touch on the designated touch-point.

NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless

communication technology.
 Note
If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward
the (N mark) of this product.
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.
If the product is in a case, remove it.
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.
Check whether [Smart Remote Embedded] is assigned to [One-touch(NFC)].

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi communications use the
same frequency band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the
Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do this, the location information interlocking function is
not available.

When you record movies using a smartphone as a remote controller, the monitor of the product
becomes darker. Also, you cannot use the viewfinder during shooting the still images or movies.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set
[Airplane Mode] to [Off].

If this product and the smartphone are connected when the product is in playback mode, the
displayed image is sent to the smartphone.

[233] Using wireless functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone

(QR code)

You can control this product using your smartphone by connecting your smartphone to the
camera using the QR code.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Smart Remote Embedded].

QR code (A) and the SSID (B) are displayed on the monitor of this product.
2 Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and select [Scan QR Code of the
Camera].

3 Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.

When a message is displayed, select [OK] again.

4 Read the QR code displayed on the monitor of this product with the smartphone.

Once the QR code has been read, a message [Connect with the camera?] will be
displayed on the monitor of the smartphone.

5 Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.

The smartphone is connected to the product.

You can shoot an image using remote control while checking the composition of the
image on the smartphone screen.

Hint
Once the QR code has been read, this product's SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered
 to the smartphone. This enables you to easily connect the smartphone to the product via Wi-Fi at a
later date by selecting the SSID.

Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi communications use the
same frequency band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the
Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do this, the location information interlocking function is
not available.

When you record movies using a smartphone as a remote controller, the monitor of the product
becomes darker. Also, you cannot use the viewfinder during shooting the still images or movies.

If you cannot connect your device to this product using the [One-touch(NFC)] function or QR code,
use the SSID and password.

[234] Using wireless functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone

(SSID)

You can control this product using your smartphone by connecting your smartphone to the
camera using the SSID and password.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Smart Remote Embedded].

QR code is displayed on the monitor of this product.

2 Press the (Delete) button of this product.

This product's SSID and password are displayed on the monitor of this product.

3 Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone.

4 Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx).

5 Input the password that is displayed on this product.

The smartphone is connected to the product.

You can shoot an image using remote control while checking the composition of the
image on the smartphone screen.

Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi communications use the
same frequency band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the
Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do this, the location information interlocking function is
not available.

When you record movies using a smartphone as a remote controller, the monitor of the product
becomes darker. Also, you cannot use the viewfinder during shooting the still images or movies.
[235] Using wireless functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR

code)

You can connect an iPhone or iPad to the camera using the QR code and operate the camera
using the iPhone or iPad.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Smart Remote Embedded].

QR code (A) and the SSID (B) are displayed on the monitor of this product.

2 Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your iPhone or iPad and select [Scan QR Code of
the Camera].

3 Select [OK] on the iPhone or iPad screen.

When a message is displayed, select [OK] again.

4 Read the QR code displayed on the monitor of this product with the iPhone or iPad.

5 Install the profile (setting information) by following the instructions shown on the
iPhone or iPad screen and select [OK].

The profile will be installed to the iPhone or iPad.

6 Select [Settings] on the "Home" screen → [Wi-Fi] → this product's SSID.

The iPhone or iPad will connect to the product.

 7 Return to the "Home" screen of the iPhone or iPad and launch PlayMemories
Mobile.

You can shoot an image using remote control while checking the composition of the
image on the screen of the iPhone or iPad.

Hint
Once the QR code has been read, this product's SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered
to the iPhone or iPad. This enables you to easily connect the iPhone or iPad to the product via Wi-Fi
at a later date by selecting the SSID.

Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi communications use the
same frequency band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the
Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do this, the location information interlocking function is
not available.

When you record movies using a smartphone as a remote controller, the monitor of the product
becomes darker. Also, you cannot use the viewfinder during shooting the still images or movies.

If you cannot connect your device to this product using the QR code, use the SSID and password.

[236] Using wireless functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

You can control the camera using an iPhone or iPad by connecting the iPhone or iPad to the
camera using the SSID and password.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Smart Remote Embedded].

QR code is displayed on the monitor of this product.

2 Press the (Delete) button of this product.

This product's SSID and password are displayed on the monitor of this product.

3 Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx) on the Wi-Fi setting
screen of your iPhone or iPad.

4 Input the password that is displayed on this product.

The iPhone or iPad is connected to the product.

5 Confirm that your iPhone or iPad was connected to the “SSID” shown on this
product.
 6 Return to the "Home" screen of the iPhone or iPad and launch PlayMemories
Mobile.

You can shoot an image using remote control while checking the composition of the
image on screen of the iPhone or iPad.

Note
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi communications use the
same frequency band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the
Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do this, the location information interlocking function is
not available.

When you record movies using a smartphone as a remote controller, the monitor of the product
becomes darker. Also, you cannot use the viewfinder during shooting the still images or movies.

[237] Using wireless functions Transferring images to a Smartphone

Send to Smartphone

You can transfer still images/movies to a smartphone and view them. The application
PlayMemories Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.

If you press the (Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting screen
for [Send to Smartphone] will appear.

2 If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the
product. Connect the smartphone and the product using that information.

The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending
on the smartphone.

Menu item details

Select on This Device:
Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All Images on This Date] or [Multiple Images].

The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.

(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control
wheel, then press MENU → [Enter].
Select on Smartphone:
Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.

Note
You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.

You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For Android smartphone
Start PlayMemories Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
For iPhone/iPad
Select PlayMemories Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image
Size].

Some images may not be displayed on the smartphone depending on the recording format.

RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.
 You cannot send XAVC S or AVCHD format movies.

This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has
permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product,
reset the connection information by following these steps. MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi
Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set
[Airplane Mode] to [Off].

[238] Using wireless functions Transferring images to a Smartphone

Sending images to an Android smartphone (NFC One-

touch Sharing)

With just one touch, you can connect this product and an NFC-enabled Android smartphone,
and send an image displayed on the product screen directly to the smartphone. For movies, you
can only transfer MP4 movies recorded with [ File Format] set to [MP4].

1 Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.

2 Display a single image on the product.

3 Touch the smartphone to the product.

The product and the smartphone are connected, and PlayMemories Mobile automatically
launches on the smartphone, and then the displayed image is sent to the smartphone.
 Before you touch the smartphone, cancel the sleep and lock-screen functions of the
smartphone.
The NFC function is available only when the (N mark) is displayed on the product.
Touch the smartphone to the product for 1-2 seconds until PlayMemories Mobile
launches.
To transfer two or more images, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Send to
Smartphone] to select images. After the connection enabled screen appears, use NFC
to connect the product and the smartphone.

About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various
devices, such as mobile phones or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with
just a touch on the designated touch-point.

NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless

communication technology.

Note
You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
Start PlayMemories Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].

RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.

If the Image Index is displayed on the product, you cannot transfer images using the NFC function.

If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:

Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward
the (N mark) of this product.
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.
If the product is in a case, remove it.
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect the product and the smartphone. Set
[Airplane Mode] to [Off].

You cannot send AVCHD format movies.

You cannot send XAVC S format movies.

[239] Using wireless functions Transferring images to a computer

Send to Computer
You can transfer images stored in the product to a computer connected to a wireless access
point or wireless broadband router and easily make backup copies using this operation. Before
starting this operation, install PlayMemories Home on your computer and register the access
point on the product.

1 Start your computer.

2 MENU → (Wireless) → [Send to Computer].

Note
Depending on the application settings of your computer, the product will turn off after saving the
images to your computer.

You can transfer images from the product to only one computer at a time.

If you want to transfer images to another computer, connect the product and the computer via a USB
connection and follow the instructions in PlayMemories Home.

When you save images to the Mac computer using Wi-Fi function, use "Wireless Auto Import."

[240] Using wireless functions Transferring images to a TV

View on TV

You can view images on a network-enabled TV by transferring them from the product without
connecting the product and TV with a cable. For some TVs, you may need to perform
operations on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [View on TV] → desired device to be connected.

2 When you want to play back images using slideshow, press the center of the control
wheel.
 To display the next/previous image manually, press the right/left sides of the control
wheel.
To change the device to be connected, press the down side of the control wheel, then
select [Device list].

Slideshow settings
You can change the slideshow settings by pressing the down side of the control wheel.
Playback Selection:
Selects the group of images to be shown.
Folder View(Still):
Selects from [All] and [All in Folder].
Date View:
Selects from [All] and [All in Date Rng.].
Interval:
Selects from [Short] and [Long].
Effects*:
Selects from [On] and [Off].
Playback Image Size:
Selects from [HD] and [4K].
* The settings are effective only for BRAVIA TV which is compatible with the functions.

Note
You can use this function on a TV that supports DLNA renderer.

You can view images on a Wi-Fi Direct-enabled TV or network-enabled TV (including wired network-
enabled TVs).

If you connect TV and this product and do not use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to register your access
point first.

Displaying the images on the TV may take time.

Movies cannot be shown on a TV via Wi-Fi. Use an HDMI cable (sold separately).

[241] Using wireless functions Reading location information from a smartphone

Loc. Info. Link Set.

You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a
smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can
record the obtained location information when shooting images.
 Preparation in advance

To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application PlayMemories
Mobile is required.
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of PlayMemories Mobile, you
need to perform the following steps beforehand.

1. Install PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone.

You can install PlayMemories Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If
you have already installed the application, update it to the latest version.

2. Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function
of the camera.

After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location
Information Linkage” will appear on the top page of the application.

Operating procedure

: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera

1. : Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.

Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In
steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application
PlayMemories Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in
step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2
through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.

2. : On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth

Function] → [On].

3. : On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].

4. : Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information

Linkage.”

If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in

advance” above.

5. : Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting

screen of PlayMemories Mobile.

6. : Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of

PlayMemories Mobile, and then select your camera from the list.
7. : Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.

Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.

8. : On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location
Info. Link] → [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded
when shooting images.

Menu item details

Location Info. Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a
linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a
linked smartphone.

Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location
information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not
established.

Hint
Location information can be linked when PlayMemories Mobile is running on your smartphone even if
the smartphone monitor is off.

When PlayMemories Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch
PlayMemories Mobile to resume location information linking.

In the application PlayMemories Home, you can view images on a map by importing images with
location information to your computer. For details, refer to Help for PlayMemories Home.

If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and
perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in PlayMemories Mobile.
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

For more detailed video instructions, refer to the following support page.
http://www.sony.net/pmm/btg/
 Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To perform pairing again,
delete the pairing information for the camera registered in PlayMemories Mobile before trying again.

The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth
connection is disconnected.

The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with
that of only one smartphone. If you want to link the location information with that of another
smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of the smartphone that is already
linked.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from
between the camera and the paired smartphone.

When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage]
menu on PlayMemories Mobile.

Supported smartphones
Android smartphones: Android 5.0 or later and compatible with Bluetooth 4.0 or later*

iPhone/iPad: iPhone 4S or later/iPad 3rd generation or later

* As of October 2016. For the latest information, refer to the support site.
* For the Bluetooth version, refer to the website for your smartphone.

[242] Using wireless functions Changing the wireless connection settings

Airplane Mode

When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions
including Wi-Fi.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.

If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.

[243] Using wireless functions Changing the wireless connection settings

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access
point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

1 MENU → (Wireless) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].

2 Press the WPS button on the access point you want to register.

Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your
access point supports the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set
to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method,
perform [Access Point Set.].

For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point
operating instructions or contact the administrator of the access point.

A connection may not be enabled depending on the surrounding conditions, such as the type of wall
material or if there is an obstruction or poor wireless signal between the product and access point. If
that happens, change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.

[244] Using wireless functions Changing the wireless connection settings

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID
name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in
some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access
point administrator.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].

2 Select the access point you want to register.

 When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access
point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting]
and set the access point.

If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the
security system.

3 Input the password, and select [OK].

Access points without the mark do not require a password.

4 Select [OK].

Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more
items.

WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway:
When you set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter the IP address to match your network
environment.

Note
To give the registered access point priority, set [Priority Connection] to [On].
[245] Using wireless functions Changing the wireless connection settings

Edit Device Name

You can change the device name for the Wi-Fi Direct or Bluetooth connection.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Edit Device Name].

2 Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].

[246] Using wireless functions Changing the wireless connection settings

Wi-Fi Settings: Disp MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of this product.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Disp MAC Address].

[247] Using wireless functions Changing the wireless connection settings

Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset

This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [Smart Remote
Embedded] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that
is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].

Note
If you connect this product to the smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must
register the smartphone again.
[248] Using wireless functions Changing the wireless connection settings

Reset Network Set.

Resets all the network settings to default settings.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Reset Network Set.] → [OK].

[249] PlayMemories Camera Apps About PlayMemories Camera Apps

PlayMemories Camera Apps

You can add the desired functions to this product by connecting to the application download
website (PlayMemories Camera Apps) via the Internet.

Press MENU → (Application) → [Introduction] for information about the service and
available countries and regions.

[250] PlayMemories Camera Apps About PlayMemories Camera Apps

Recommended computer environment

For details on the recommended computer environments for downloading an application and
adding functions to the product, refer to the following URL:
“PlayMemories Camera Apps” website (http://www.sony.net/pmca/)

[251] PlayMemories Camera Apps Installing the applications

Opening a service account

You can open a service account, which is required to download applications.

1 Access the application download website.

http://www.sony.net/pmca/

2 Follow the instructions on the screen and acquire a service account.

Follow the instructions on the screen to download the desired application to the
product.

[252] PlayMemories Camera Apps Installing the applications

Downloading applications

You can download applications using your computer.

1 Access the application downloading website.

http://www.sony.net/pmca/

2 Select the desired application and download the application to the product following
the instructions on the screen.

Connect the computer and the product using the micro USB cable (supplied), following
the instructions on the screen.
[253] PlayMemories Camera Apps Installing the applications

Downloading applications directly to the product

using the Wi-Fi function

You can download applications using the Wi-Fi function without connecting to a computer.
Acquire a service account in advance.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → (PlayMemories Camera Apps),

then follow the instructions on the screen to download applications.

Note
If MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.] → access point to be connected
→ [IP Address Setting] is set to [Manual], change the setting to [Auto].

[254] PlayMemories Camera Apps Starting the applications

Launching the downloaded application (Application

List)

Launch an application that has been downloaded from the application download website
PlayMemories Camera Apps.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → desired application to launch.

Hint
How to launch the applications faster
Assign [Download Appli.] and [Application List] to the custom key. You can launch the applications or
display application list only by pressing the custom key during the shooting information screen is
displayed.

[255] PlayMemories Camera Apps Starting the applications

Calling up an application using [One-touch(NFC)]

You can call up a desired application from the application menu of this product by touching an
NFC-enabled Android smartphone to the product. If the application you call up has a feature
that works with the smartphone, the product and the smartphone will be connected via Wi-Fi.
To
use this function, register the desired application in advance.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [One-touch(NFC)] → desired application.

2 Switch this product to shooting mode, then touch an NFC-enabled smartphone to

the (N mark) on the product for 1-2 seconds.

PlayMemories Mobile launches on the smartphone, and the application you have
registered launches on this product.

Note
When the product is in playback mode, the registered application will not launch even if you touch
the smartphone to the product.

When you call up an application with one touch, even if that application does not work with a
smartphone, PlayMemories Mobile on smartphone will launch. Exit PlayMemories Mobile without
performing an operation. If you do not exit PlayMemories Mobile, the smartphone stays in standby
connection status.

[Smart Remote Embedded] is assigned to [One-touch(NFC)] as a default setting.

[256] PlayMemories Camera Apps Managing the applications

Uninstalling applications

You can uninstall applications from this product.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Application Management] →

[Manage and Remove].

2 Select the application to be uninstalled.

3 Select to uninstall the application.

 The uninstalled application can be re-installed. For details, see the application download
website.

[257] PlayMemories Camera Apps Managing the applications

Changing the order of applications

You can change the order in which added applications are displayed on this product.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Application Management] →

[Sort].

2 Select the application of which you want to change the order.

3 Select the destination.

[258] PlayMemories Camera Apps Managing the applications

Confirming the account information of PlayMemories

Camera Apps

The account information for the “Sony Entertainment Network” that is registered on the product
is displayed.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Application Management] →

[Display Account Information].

[259] Using a computer

Recommended computer environment
You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the following URL:
http://www.sony.net/pcenv/

[260] Using a computer

Software for Mac computers

For details on software for Mac computers, access the following URL:
http://www.sony.co.jp/imsoft/Mac/

Wireless Auto Import

“Wireless Auto Import” is required if you are using a Mac computer and want to import images
to the computer using Wi-Fi function. Download the software from the URL above, and install it
on your Mac computer.
For details, see Help for “Wireless Auto Import.”

Note
The software that can be used varies depending on the region.

[261] Using a computer Importing images for use on a computer

PlayMemories Home

With PlayMemories Home, you can do the following:

You can import images shot with this product to your computer.
You can play back the images imported to your computer.
You can share your images using PlayMemories Online.
You can edit movies such as by cutting or merging.
You can add various effects such as BGM and subtitles to movies.
You can change the playback speed of movies and slow-motion movies.

Also for Windows, you can do the following:

You can organize images on the computer on a calendar by shooting date to view them.
 You can edit and correct images, such as by trimming and resizing.
You can create a disc from movies imported to a computer.
Blu-ray discs or AVCHD discs can be created from XAVC S-format movies.
You can upload images to a network service. (An Internet connection is required.)
You can import images recorded with location information to a computer and view them on a
map.
For other details, please refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home.

[262] Using a computer Importing images for use on a computer

Installing PlayMemories Home

1 Using your computer's Internet browser, go to the URL below and download
PlayMemories Home by following the on-screen instructions.

http://www.sony.net/pm/
An Internet connection is required.
For detailed instructions, visit the PlayMemories Home support page (English only).
http://www.sony.co.jp/pmh-se/

2 Connect the product to your computer using the micro USB cable (supplied), then
turn the product on.

New functions may be added to PlayMemories Home. Even if PlayMemories Home

has already been installed on your computer, connect this product and your computer
again.
Do not remove the micro USB cable (supplied) from the camera while the camera is in
operation or the access screen is displayed. Doing so may damage the data.

A: To the Multi/Micro USB Terminal

B: To the USB jack of the computer
 Note
Log on as Administrator.

It may be necessary to restart your computer. When the restart confirmation message appears,
restart the computer following the instructions on the screen.

DirectX may be installed depending on your computer’s system environment.

[263] Using a computer Importing images for use on a computer

Connecting the camera to a computer

1 Insert a fully charged battery pack into the camera, or connect the camera to a wall
outlet (wall socket) using an AC Adaptor (sold separately).

2 Turn on the camera and the computer.

3 Check that [USB Connection] under (Setup) is set to [Mass Storage].

4 Connect the camera to the computer using the micro USB cable (supplied) (A).

When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for
recognizing the camera may start automatically on the computer. Wait until the
procedure is finished.

If you connect the product to your computer using the micro USB cable when [USB
Power Supply] is set to [On], power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting:
[On])
[264] Using a computer Importing images for use on a computer

Importing images to the computer without using

PlayMemories Home

PlayMemories Home allows you to easily import images. For details on PlayMemories Home
functions, see the Help of PlayMemories Home.

Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home (For

Windows)
When the AutoPlay Wizard appears after making a USB connection between this product and a
computer, click [Open folder to view files] → [OK] → [DCIM] or [MP_ROOT]. Then copy the
desired images to the computer.

Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home (For

Mac)
Connect the product to your Mac computer. Double-click the newly recognized icon on the
desktop → the folder in which the image you want to import is stored. Then drag and drop the
image file on to the hard disk icon.

Note
For operations such as importing XAVC S movies or AVCHD movies to the computer, use
PlayMemories Home.

Do not edit or otherwise process AVCHD or XAVC S movie files/folders from the connected
computer. Movie files may be damaged or become unplayable. Do not delete or copy AVCHD
movies or XAVC S movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not held liable for
consequences resulting from such operations via the computer.

[265] Using a computer Importing images for use on a computer

Disconnecting the camera from the computer

Perform steps 1 and 2 below before performing the following operations:

Disconnecting the micro USB cable.

 Removing a memory card.
Turning off the product.

1 Click (Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.

2 Click the displayed message.

Note
On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The
camera will be disconnected from the computer.

On Windows 7/Windows 8 computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In that case, you can
skip the steps above.

Do not remove the micro USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be
damaged.

[266] Using a computer Developing RAW images (Image Data Converter)

Image Data Converter

With Image Data Converter, you can do the following:

You can print and edit images recorded in RAW format with various corrections, such as
tone curve and sharpness.
You can adjust images with white balance, exposure, and [Creative Style], etc.
You can save the still images displayed and edited on a computer.
You can either save the still image as RAW format or save it in the general file format.
You can display and compare the RAW images and JPEG images recorded by this product.
You can rank images in five grades.
You can apply color labels.

[267] Using a computer Developing RAW images (Image Data Converter)

Installing Image Data Converter

1 Download and install the software by accessing the following URL.

 Windows
http://www.sony.co.jp/imsoft/Win/
Mac
http://www.sony.co.jp/imsoft/Mac/

Note
Log on as Administrator.

[268] Using a computer Controlling the camera from a computer (Remote Camera Control)

Remote Camera Control

When using Remote Camera Control, the following operations are available on your computer.

Changing this product’s settings and shooting.

Recording images directly to the computer.
Performing interval timer shooting.

Use these functions after selecting MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → [PC
Remote]. For details on how to use Remote Camera Control, refer to the Help.

[269] Using a computer Controlling the camera from a computer (Remote Camera Control)

Installing Remote Camera Control

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:

Windows:
http://www.sony.co.jp/imsoft/Win/
Mac:
http://www.sony.co.jp/imsoft/Mac/

[270] Using a computer Creating a movie disc

Selecting a disc to be created

You can create a disc that can be played back on other devices from a movie recorded on this
camera.
What devices can play back the disc depends on the disc type. Select a disc type suitable for
the playback devices you will be using.
Depending on the movie type, the movie format may be converted when creating a disc.

High-definition image quality (HD) (Blu-ray Disc)

High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on a Blu-ray Disc, creating a high-
definition image quality (HD) disc.
A Blu-ray Disc enables you to record longer-duration high-definition image quality (HD) movies
than DVD discs.
Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD, MP4 (AVC)
Players: Blu-ray Disc playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 3, etc.)

High-definition image quality (HD) (AVCHD recording disc)

High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R
discs, creating a high-definition image quality (HD) disc.
Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD, MP4 (AVC)
Players: AVCHD format playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 3, etc.)
You cannot play these kinds of discs on ordinary DVD players.

Standard definition image quality (STD)

Standard definition image quality (STD) movies converted from high-definition image quality
(HD) movies can be recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R discs, creating a standard image
quality (STD) disc.
Writable movie formats: AVCHD
Players: Ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD players, computers that can play back DVD
discs, etc.)

Hint
You can use the following types of 12 cm discs with PlayMemories Home.
BD-R/DVD-R/DVD+R/DVD+R DL: Non-rewritable
BD-RE/DVD-RW/DVD+RW: Rewritable
Additional recording is not possible.

Always maintain your “PlayStation 3” to use the latest version of the “PlayStation 3” system software.

Note
 4K movies cannot be recorded on a disc in 4K image quality.

[271] Using a computer Creating a movie disc

Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image

quality movies

You can create Blu-ray Discs that can be played back on Blu-ray Disc playback devices (such
as Sony Blu-ray Disc players or the PlayStation 3, etc.).

A. How to create using a computer

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create Blu-ray
Discs using PlayMemories Home.
Your computer must be able to create Blu-ray Discs.
When you create a Blu-ray Disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a
USB cable. The necessary software is automatically added to your computer. (An Internet
connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help guide for
PlayMemories Home.

B. How to create using a device other than a computer

You can also create Blu-ray Discs using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.

For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.

Note
When creating Blu-ray discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the XAVC S or
MP4 movie formats, the image quality is converted to 1920×1080 (60i/50i) and it is not possible to
create discs with the original image quality.
To record movies with the original image quality, copy movies to a computer or an external medium.

To create a Blu-ray Disc from movies recorded in the AVCHD movie format with [ Record Setting]
set to [60p 28M(PS) ]/[50p 28M(PS) ], you need to use a device that is compliant with
AVCHD format Ver. 2.0. The created Blu-ray Disc can be played back only on a device that is
compliant with AVCHD format Ver. 2.0.

[272] Using a computer Creating a movie disc

Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from
high-definition image quality movies
You can create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) that can be played back on AVCHD-
compatible playback devices (such as Sony Blu-ray Disc players or the PlayStation 3, etc.).

A. How to create using a computer

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create DVD
discs (AVCHD recording discs) using PlayMemories Home.
Your computer must be able to create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs).
When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a
USB cable. The necessary software is automatically added to your computer. (An Internet
connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help guide for
PlayMemories Home.

B. How to create using a device other than a computer

You can also create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.
For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.

Note
When creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using PlayMemories Home from movies
recorded in the XAVC S or MP4 movie formats, the image quality is converted to 1920×1080
(60i/50i) and it is not possible to create discs with the original image quality.
To record movies with the original image quality, copy movies to a computer or an external medium.

When creating AVCHD recording discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the
AVCHD movie format with [ Record Setting] set to [60p 28M(PS) ]/[50p 28M(PS) ], [60i
24M(FX) ]/[50i 24M(FX) ] or [24p 24M(FX) ]/[25p 24M(FX) ], the image quality is
converted and it is not possible to create discs with the original image quality.
This conversion can take a long time. To record movies with the original image quality, use a Blu-ray
Disc.

[273] Using a computer Creating a movie disc

Creating DVD discs from standard image quality

movies

You can create DVD discs that can be played back on ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD
players, computers that can play back DVD discs, etc.).

A. How to create using a computer

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create DVD disc
using PlayMemories Home.
Your computer must be able to create DVD discs.
When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a
USB cable. Install the dedicated add-on software following the on-screen instructions. (An
internet connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help for
PlayMemories Home.

B. How to create using a device other than a computer

You can also create DVD discs using a Blu-ray recorder, HDD recorder, etc.

For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.

[274] List of MENU items

Using MENU items

You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and
operating method. You can also execute camera functions from the MENU.

1 Press the MENU button to display the menu items.

2 Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of
the control wheel or by turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the
control wheel.

Select an icon at the top of the screen and press the left/right side of the control wheel
to move to another MENU item.
 3 Select the desired setting value, and press the center to confirm your selection.

[275] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Quality (still image)

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

RAW:
File format: RAW (Records using the RAW compression format)

Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a
computer for professional purposes.

The image size is fixed to the maximum size. The image size is not displayed on the screen.

RAW & JPEG:

File format: RAW (Records using the RAW compression format) + JPEG

A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need
2 image files, a JPEG for viewing, and a RAW for editing. The JPEG image quality is set to
[Fine].
Extra fine:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format and recorded using a higher quality than with
[Fine].
Fine:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format when recorded.
Standard:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format when recorded. Since the compression rate of
[Standard] is higher than that of [Fine], the file size of [Standard] is smaller than that of [Fine].
This will allow more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality will be
lower.

About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Image Data Converter is
needed. With Image Data Converter, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a
popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or readjust the white balance, saturation or
contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However,
resolution is limited to 12 bits in the following shooting modes:

[ Long Exposure NR]

[BULB]
Continuous shooting
(including continuous shooting in [Superior Auto] mode)
[ Silent Shooting]

Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG
format.

You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.

[276] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Image Size (still image)

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on
large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Image Size] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]
L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels
M: 12M 4240×2832 pixels
S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels
When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9]
L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels
M: 10M 4240×2400 pixels
S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels
 Note
When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images corresponds
to "L."

[277] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Aspect Ratio (still image)

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.

Menu item details

3:2:
Suitable for standard prints.
16:9:
For viewing on a high-definition TV.

[278] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Panorama: Size

Sets the image size when shooting panoramic images. The image size varies depending on the
[Panorama: Direction] setting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Size] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Up] or [Down]
Standard: 3872×2160
Wide: 5536×2160

When [Panorama: Direction] is set to [Left] or [Right]

Standard: 8192×1856
Wide: 12416×1856
[279] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Panorama: Direction

Sets the direction to pan the camera when shooting panoramic images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Panorama: Direction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Right:
Pan the camera from the left to the right.
Left:
Pan the camera from the right to the left.
Up:
Pan the camera from the bottom to the top.
Down:
Pan the camera from the top to the bottom.

[280] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Long Exposure NR (still image)

When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise
reduction is turned on for the duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the
grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction
is in progress, a message appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize
the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
 Noise reduction may not be activated even if [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following
situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].

[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].

The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action], [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti
Motion Blur] is selected.
The ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR].

[ Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]

Depending on the shooting conditions, the camera may not perform noise reduction, even if the
shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer.

[281] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

High ISO NR (still image)

When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more
noticeable when the product sensitivity is high. A message may be displayed during noise
reduction processing; you cannot shoot another image until the message disappears.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note
[ High ISO NR] is not available in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]

When [ Quality] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.

 [ High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ Quality] is [RAW & JPEG].

[282] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Color Space (still image)

The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color
reproduction is called “color space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose
of the image.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.

Menu item details

sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as
when you intend to print out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is
vivid green or red, Adobe RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”

Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color
space. Images may not be printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers
that do not support Adobe RGB.

When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant
devices, the images will be displayed with low saturation.

[283] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Lens Comp.: Shading Comp.

Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → [Shading Comp.] → desired

setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
Compensates for darker corners of the screen automatically.
Off:
Does not compensate for darker corners of the screen.

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

The amount of light around the edges may not be corrected, depending on the lens type.

[284] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Lens Comp.: Chro. Aber. Comp.

Reduces the color deviation at the corners of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → [Chro. Aber. Comp.] → desired

setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Reduces the color deviation automatically.
Off:
Does not compensate for the color deviation.

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

[285] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Lens Comp.: Distortion Comp.

Compensates for the distortion of the screen, caused by certain lens characteristics.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → [Distortion Comp.] → desired

setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
Compensates for distortion of the screen automatically.
Off:
Does not compensate for distortion of the screen.

Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].

[286] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Switching the auto mode (Auto Mode)

Switch the auto mode between [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto].

1 Set the mode dial to .

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Auto Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Intelligent Auto:
Shoots using automatic scene recognition.
Superior Auto:
Shoots automatically while reducing blurring and noise.

[287] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Scene Selection

Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.

1 Set the mode dial to SCN (Scene Selection).

 2 Turn the control dial to select the desired setting.

Menu item details

Portrait:
Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.

Sports Action:
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing still.
The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

Macro:
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.

Landscape:
Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.

Sunset:
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.

Night Scene:
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
 Hand-held Twilight:
Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are taken,
and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera-shake, and noise.

Night Portrait:
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
The flash does not pop up automatically. Pop up the flash manually before shooting.

Anti Motion Blur:

Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The product
shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur and noise.

Note
Under the following settings, the shutter speed is slower, so use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent the image from blurring:
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]

In the [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] mode, the shutter clicks 4 times and an image is
recorded.

If you select [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] with [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image
quality becomes [Fine] temporarily.

Reducing blur is less effective even in [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] when shooting the
following subjects:
Subjects with erratic movement.
Subjects that are too close to the product.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, a beach, or a lawn.
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.
 In the case of [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur], block noise may occur when using a light
source that flickers, such as fluorescent lighting.

The minimum distance that you can come close to a subject does not change even if you select
[Macro]. For the minimum in-focus range, refer to the minimum distance of the lens attached to the
product.

Hint
To change the scene, rotate the control dial on the shooting screen and select a new scene.

[288] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

S. Auto Img. Extract.

Sets whether or not to save all the images that were shot continuously in [Superior Auto].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [S. Auto Img. Extract.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Saves one appropriate image selected by the product.
Off:
Saves all of the images.

Note
Even if you set [S. Auto Img. Extract.] to [Off] with [Hand-held Twilight] selected as the scene
recognition mode, one combined image is saved.

When the Auto Framing function is activated, two images are saved even if you set [S. Auto Img.
Extract.] to [Auto].

When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the shooting function will be limited.

[289] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Drive Mode

Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or
bracketing shooting.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) on the control wheel → desired setting.

You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

Menu item details

Single Shooting:
Normal shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting:
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer:
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont):
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of
seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket:
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of brightness.
Single Bracket:
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of brightness.
WB bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings
for white balance, color temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.

Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action] is selected, [Single
Shooting] cannot be performed.

[290] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Bracket Settings

You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure
bracketing and white balance bracketing.

1 Select / (Drive Mode) of the control wheel → select bracket shooting mode.
 You can also set the drive mode by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) →
[Drive Mode].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Selftimer during Brkt:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds
until the shutter is released if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)

[291] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered
with [ / Memory] in advance.

1 Set the mode dial to 1, 2 (Memory recall).

2 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU → (Camera
Settings1) → [ / Recall].

Hint
To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to 1 or 2, then select the desired
number by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.

Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled
with this camera.

Note
 If you set [ / Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are
given priority and the original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before
shooting.

[292] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to register up to 2 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4
(M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ / Memory] → desired number.

3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are
displayed on the menu of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed

To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.

Program Shift cannot be registered.

[293] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Focus Mode
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

(Single-shot AF):
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
(Automatic AF):
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it
determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to focus when the subject is in motion.
During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with Continuous AF from the
second shot.
(Continuous AF):
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use
this when the subject is in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera
focuses.
(DMF):

You can make fine adjustments manually after the focus is locked, letting you focus on a subject
more quickly than when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in
situations such as macro shooting.
(Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use
manual focus.

Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of
the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.

Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
Back-lit subjects
 Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances

Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.

When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while
focusing. This does not affect the actual recorded images.

Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available in the movie shooting mode.

Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been
assigned the [Focus Hold] function.

[294] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Priority Set in AF-S

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [Focus Mode] is set
to [Single-shot AF], [DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is remaining still.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

[295] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Priority Set in AF-C

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is
activated and the subject is in motion.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.

Menu item details

AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

[296] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Focus Area

Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus
mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Wide :
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press
the shutter button halfway down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed
around the area that is in focus.
Zone :
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus
area.
Center :
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock
function to create the composition you want.
Flexible Spot :
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an
extremely small subject in a narrow area.
Expand Flexible Spot :
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible
spot as a secondary priority area for focusing.
Lock-on AF :
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within
the selected autofocus area. This setting is available only when the focus mode is set to
[Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Lock-on AF] on the [Focus Area] setting screen, and then
adjust the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can
also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a flexible spot
or expand flexible spot.

List of focus range finder frames

The focus range finder frame differs as follows depending on the shooting mode.
When focusing on a larger area

When focusing on a smaller area

When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone] and you aim at a moving subject, the focus
range finder frame for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1 or LA-EA3) (sold
separately) and [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], the focus range finder
frame for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.

When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is
disabled and the focus area frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority
on and around the center area.
To move the focus area
When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], if pressing the
button to which [Focus Standard] is assigned, you can shoot while moving the focus area
using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel. To change the shooting settings
using the control wheel, press the button to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set
[Touch Operation] to other than [Off] beforehand.

Note
[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
During Smile Shutter mode

The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all
the way down at once.

When the mode dial is set to (Movie/S&Q Motion) or during movie shooting, [Lock-on AF] cannot
be selected as the [Focus Area].

When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the size of the AF range finder frame may be
automatically adjusted according to the subject and the composition as follows:
When focusing on a wider area such as a landscape: A larger AF range finder frame is displayed.
When focusing on a smaller area such as flowers or small items: A smaller AF range finder frame
is displayed.

You cannot perform functions assigned to the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or the
custom button 3 while moving the focusing frame.

[297] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

AF Illuminator (still image)

The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In
the time between pressing the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the red AF
illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF Illuminator] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.

Note
You cannot use [ AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
In movie mode
Sweep Panorama
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is moving (when
the focus indicator or lights up).
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.
When [Scene Selection] is set to the following modes:
[Landscape]
[Sports Action]
[Night Scene]

When a Mount Adaptor is attached.

The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly
into the AF illuminator at close range.

[298] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Center Lock-on AF

When you press the center of the control wheel, the camera detects the subject positioned in
the center of the screen and continues to track the subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Center Lock-on AF] → [On].

2 Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press the center of the control wheel.

Press the center again to stop tracking.

 3 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

Hint
You can select the subject to be tracked by touch operation when shooting using the monitor. Set
[Touch Operation] to other than [Off].

Note
The [Center Lock-on AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:
The subject is moving too quickly.
The subject is too small, or too large.
The contrast between the subject and the background is poor.
It is dark.
The ambient light changes.

Lock-on AF does not work in the following situations:

[Sweep Panorama]
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur].
When shooting in Manual Focus mode.
When using the digital zoom
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].

[299] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

AF System (still image)

Sets the focus detection system (Phase Detection AF/Contrast AF) when you attach an A-
mount lens using an LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF System] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Phase Detection AF:
Focuses with Phase Detection AF.
The focusing speed is very fast.
Contrast AF:
Always focuses with Contrast AF.
The focusing speed is slower. Use when you cannot focus
with [Phase Detection AF].

Note
When [ AF System] is set to [Contrast AF], (Continuous AF) under [Focus Mode] is
unavailable.
 The following functions are unavailable when [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF]:
[Zone], [Expand Flexible Spot], and [Lock-on AF] in [Focus Area]
[Eye AF]

When [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], even if [Priority Set in AF-S] is set to
[Balanced Emphasis], the camera will temporarily switch to [AF].

[300] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

AF w/ shutter (still image)

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select
[Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.

Useful method to micro-adjust the focus

When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than
the shutter button lets you focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.

1. Set [ AF w/ shutter] to [Off].

2. MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → assign the [AF On] and
[Focus Magnifier] functions to the desired keys.
3. Set [ Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to avoid auto focusing when you look through the viewfinder.
4. Press the key to which the [AF On] function is assigned.
5. Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus
ring for micro-adjustments of the focus.
6. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

[301] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Pre-AF (still image)

The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Note
[ Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.

[302] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through an Electronic Viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Eye-Start AF] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Auto focusing starts when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.
Off:
Auto focusing does not start when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.

Hint
[ Eye-Start AF] is available when an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA2, LA-EA4) (sold
separately) are attached.

[303] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

AF Area Auto Clear

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically
shortly after focus is achieved.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.

[304] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Disp. cont. AF area

You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to
[Wide] or [Zone], in [Continuous AF] mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.

Note
When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center]
[Flexible Spot]
[Expand Flexible Spot]

When an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1/LA-EA3) (sold separately) are mounted on the
camera and [ AF System] is set to [Phase Detection AF], [Disp. cont. AF area] is always turned
on regardless of the [Focus Area] settings.
[305] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

AF Micro Adj.

Allows you to adjust and register an autofocused position for each lens, when using an A-mount
lens with the Mount Adaptor LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 (sold separately).
In general use, you do not need to adjust the autofocused position using this function. Use this
function only when adjustments are needed for certain focal lengths. Note that the auto focus
function may not be performed at a proper position when using this adjustment.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → select [AF Micro Adj.].

2 Select [AF Adjustment Set.] → [On].

3 [amount] → desired value.

The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the
product. The smaller the value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to
the product.

Hint
It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. Set [Focus Area] to
[Flexible Spot] and use a bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.

Note
When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears
on the screen. [±0] appears for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.

If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be
registered. To register a new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its
value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses using [Clear].

The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.]
with lenses other than the supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be
affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an unsupported lens.

You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same
specification.
[306] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Exposure Comp.

Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by
auto exposure, you can make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.]
to the plus side or minus side, respectively (exposure compensation).

1 (Exposure Comp.) on the control wheel → press the left/right side of the control
wheel or turn the control wheel, and select the desired exposure range.

You can also select MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.].

You can adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to + 5.0 EV.
You can check the exposure value you set on the shooting screen (A).
Monitor

Viewfinder

Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]

When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set
 to [ISO AUTO].

Only a value between -3.0 EV and + 3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the
screen when shooting. If you set an exposure beyond this range, the image brightness on the screen
does not show the effect, but it will be reflected in the recorded image.

You can adjust the exposure in a range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.

If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not
be able to get a satisfactory effect.

[307] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

ISO

Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger
the number, the higher the sensitivity.

1 ISO (ISO) on the control wheel → select desired setting.

You can also select MENU→ (Camera Settings1) → [ISO].

Menu item details

Multi Frame NR:
Combines continuous shots to create an image with less noise. Press the right side to display
the setting screen, then select a desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
Select the desired ISO number from ISO AUTO or ISO 100 – ISO 51200.
ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 100 – ISO 51200:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

Note
When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.

When [Multi Frame NR] is selected, the flash, [D-Range Opt.], or [Auto HDR] cannot be used.

When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.

When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off], [Multi Frame NR] cannot be selected.

[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
 The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.

The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting
movies, or shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 25600 are available. If the ISO value is set to a
value larger than 25600, the setting is automatically switched to 25600. When you finish recording
the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

When you use [Multi Frame NR], it takes some time for the product to perform the overlay processing
of images.

When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will
be automatically adjusted within the set range.

Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select
[ISO AUTO] and press the right side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO
Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum]. The values are also applied when shooting in [ISO AUTO]
mode under [Multi Frame NR].

You can set the effect level for noise reduction by selecting [NR Effect] under [Multi Frame NR].

[308] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

ISO AUTO Min. SS

If you select [ISO AUTO] or [ISO AUTO] under [Multi Frame NR] when the shooting mode is P
(Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO
sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while
also preventing camera shake.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.

Menu item details

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can
prevent camera shake and subject blurring.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can
shoot images with less noise.
1/4000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast],
[Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.

Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO
AUTO], in order to shoot with an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the
speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].

In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-
syncing speed of 1/160 seconds.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash] or [Wireless].
(The minimum shutter speed is limited to the speed automatically determined by the camera.)

[309] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Metering Mode

Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the
exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the
proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the
screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This mode is suitable for measuring light on a
specified part of the entire screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot:
Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends the setting for [Spot
Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the
composition or the position of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is
suitable for shooting the subject while avoiding overexposure.

Hint
When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot]
while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated
with the focus area.

When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Opt.] or [Auto HDR] function is
activated, the brightness and the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into
small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow. Make settings based on the shooting
circumstances.

Note
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom

In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.

[310] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [Focus Area] is
set to [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters
brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Note
 When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot] or [Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering
position is locked to the center.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Lock-on AF: Flexible Spot] or [Lock-on AF:Expand Flexible Spot], the
spot metering position coordinates to the Lock-on AF start position, but does not coordinate with the
tracking of the subject.

[311] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Exposure step

You can set the setting range for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation
values.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure step] → desired setting.

Menu item details

0.3EV/0.5EV

[312] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button
halfway down when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [Focus Mode] is set to
[Automatic AF], and the product determines that the subject is moving, or you shoot burst
images, the fixed exposure is cancelled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode
when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.

Note
Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the [ AEL w/ shutter] settings.

[313] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering

mode.

2 Select the desired value as the metering standard.

You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Avg./ Highlight

Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.

The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.

The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in
[Exposure Std. Adjust].

The value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure
compensation value. The amount of exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure
compensation value.

If you set [Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing
will be reset.
[314] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Flash Mode

You can set the flash mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a
clear image of both the subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear
sync shooting allows you to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a
moving car or a walking person.
Wireless:
Using a wireless flash creates a shading effect that gives the subject a more 3D appearance
than when using the camera's flash.
This mode is effective when you attach a remote control-compatible external flash (sold
separately) to the product, and shoot with a wireless flash (sold separately), placed away from
the product.

Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.

Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.

The [Wireless] setting cannot be used with the camera’s built-in flash.

[315] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes
the amount of flash light only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along
with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.

Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side)
makes the flash level lower.

Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]

The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if
the subject is outside the maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash
effect (- side) may not be visible.

[316] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Exp.comp.set

Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient
light, or just ambient light.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.
[317] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Red Eye Reduction

When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye
phenomenon.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.

Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and
conditions, such as distance to the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.

[318] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

White Balance

Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white.
Use this function when the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when
you want to change the color tones on purpose for photographic expression.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto/ Daylight/ Shade/ Cloudy/ Incandescent/ Fluor.:
Warm White/ Fluor.: Cool White/ Fluor.: Day White/ Fluor.: Daylight/
Flash/ Underwater Auto: When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the
product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light source (preset white balance). When
you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color
Compensation) filters for photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
Custom Setup:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.

Select a memorized custom white balance number.

Hint
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as
required by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket]
shooting.

or is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].

Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]

If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be
obtained because of the characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash
or select [Custom Setup].

[319] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent
light when [White Balance] is set to [Auto].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm
atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
[320] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

D-Range Opt. (DRO)

By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow
between the subject and the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and
gradation.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Opt.].

2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level
from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong).

Note
In the following situations, [D-Range Opt.] is fixed to [Off]:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
Multi Frame NR
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]

[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the following modes are selected in [Scene Selection].
[Sunset]
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Hand-held Twilight]
[Anti Motion Blur]

The setting is fixed to [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when [Scene Selection] modes other than the
above modes are selected.

When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p 100M], [100p 100M], [120p 60M] or [100p 60M],
[DRO/Auto HDR] will be set to [Off].

When shooting with [D-Range Opt.], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the
recorded image, especially when you enhance the effect.
[321] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Auto HDR

Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure,
the bright parts of an underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to
create images with a greater range of gradation (High Dynamic Range). One image with proper
exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].

2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level
from 1.0EV (weak) to 6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the
following exposure levels: -1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.

Hint
The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition before shooting.

Note
This function is not available when the [ Quality] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:

When [Multi Frame NR] is selected.
When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
When [Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].

You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.
 You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the
shooting conditions.

When the flash is used, this function has little effect.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not
obtain good HDR images. will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when
the camera detects image blurring. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid
image blur, as needed.

[322] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Creative Style

Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and
sharpness for each image style. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed and aperture) as you
like with this function, unlike with [Scene Selection], where the product adjusts the exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].

2 Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom sides of the control
wheel.

3 To adjust (Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired

item using the right/left sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.

4 When selecting [Style Box], move to the right side using the right side of the control
wheel, and then select the desired style.

You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.
 (A): Displayed only when Style Box is selected

Menu item details

Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and
subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral:
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also
suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear:
For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant
light.
Deep:
For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of
the subject.
Light:
For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light
ambience.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery.
Distant landscapes also stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene:
The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves:
For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Style Box):
Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side ( )) to register preferred
settings. Then select the desired settings using the right button.
You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]

[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as
[Standard] and [Landscape], and for each [Style Box] to which you can register preferred
settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value
using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and
the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the
color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated,
and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.

Note
[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].

When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.

[323] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Picture Effect

Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

 Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and
white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Soft Focus:
Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
HDR Painting:
Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Miniature:
Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused
considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
Watercolor:
Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
Illustration:
Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.

Hint
You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes
[Toy Camera] less effective.

When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject
or shooting conditions.

You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the
image after the shot. Also, you cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You
cannot use these effects with movies.
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
 [Rich-tone Mono.]
[Miniature]
[Watercolor]
[Illustration]

In the case of [HDR Painting] and [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot.
Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition during shooting.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred,
you may not be able to obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation, appear
on the recorded image to inform you of this situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image
carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

This function is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]

When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.

[324] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Picture Profile

Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc. For details on “Picture Profile,”
refer to http://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.

Customizing the picture profile

You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and
[Detail]. When setting these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust
them while observing the picture on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to

change.

2 Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.

3 Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
 4 Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press
in the center.

Using the preset of the picture profile

The default settings [PP1] through [PP9] for movies have been set in advance in the camera
based on various shooting conditions.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.

PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma
PP8:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3.Cine] under [Color Mode].
PP9:
Example setting using the [S-Log3] gamma and the [S-Gamut3] under [Color Mode].

Items of the picture profile

Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)

Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a
relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to
HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in
black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3]. The contrast in dark parts is
lower and the contrast in bright parts is higher than for [Movie].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-
Log2] or [S-Log3].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture will
be processed after shooting.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on
the assumption that the picture will be processed after shooting.

Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black
stretch))

Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting
signals in high intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
When selecting [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [Cine3], [Cine4], [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], [S-Log3] in
[Gamma], [Knee] is set to [Off] if [Mode] is set to [Auto]. To use functions in [Knee], set [Mode]
to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.

Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode].

Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)

Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].

Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))

Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when
combined with ITU709 gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting.
Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after
shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color
space that can easily be converted for digital cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting.
Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.

Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)

Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)

Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors
and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting
value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the negative
side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)

Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are
set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the
vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W).
(Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit
level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening
level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)

To copy the settings to another picture profile number

You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy].

To Reset the picture profile to the default setting

You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile
settings at once.
MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset].

Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you change the
shooting mode.

If you print RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth

When the [ Record Setting] is [120p 100M]/[100p 100M] or [120p 60M]/[100p 60M], [Black
Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted.

If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.

There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting
the lens compensation to [Off].

When using S-Log2 or S-Log3 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using
other gammas. If the noise still is significant even after processing pictures, it may be improved by
shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic range becomes narrower accordingly when
you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by test shooting
when using S-Log2 or S-Log3.

Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup.
In this case, perform custom setup with a gamma other than [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3]
first, and then reselect [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2], or [S-Log3] gamma.

Setting [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] or [S-Log3] disables the [Black Level] setting.

If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set], [Knee] is set to [Off].

S-Gamut, S-Gamut3.Cine, and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this
camera's S-Gamut setting does not support the whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve
a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.

[325] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Soft Skin Effect (still image)

Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Soft Skin Effect] → desired setting.

Menu item details
Off:
Does not use the [ Soft Skin Effect] function.
On:
Uses the [ Soft Skin Effect].

Hint
When [ Soft Skin Effect] is set to [On], you can select the effect level.
Select the effect level by
pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.

Note
[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [ Quality] is [RAW].

[ Soft Skin Effect] is not available for RAW images when the [ Quality] is [RAW & JPEG].

[326] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Focus Magnifier

You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [ MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

2 Press the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the position
you want to enlarge using top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.

3 Confirm the focus.

When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is
magnified. The [Focus Magnifier] function will be canceled when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during
the auto-focusing, different functions are performed depending on the [ AF in Focus
Mag.] setting.

When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.

 When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is
canceled.

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time].

4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can adjust the focus on the magnified image touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to
other than [Off] beforehand. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can perform [Focus
Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor. While
shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping
and you can move the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of
the control wheel.

Hint
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the
touch panel.

To end the focus magnifier function, double-tap again. When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off],
the focus magnifier function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

[327] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Focus Magnif. Time

Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [ MF Assist] or [Focus
Magnifier] function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.

[328] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where
you want to focus. While the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area
than the flexible spot.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].

2 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

3 Magnify the image by pressing the center of the control wheel, and then adjust the
position using top/bottom/right/left of the control wheel.

The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

The focus will be achieved at point of in the center of the screen.

5 Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

The [ AF in Focus Mag.] function is canceled after shooting.

Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.

You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust
the focus position, adjust the focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button
halfway down.
 Note
The edges of the screen may be unfocused.

The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.

[ AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

In [Sweep Panorama] mode
During movie shooting
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M.
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Eye AF]
[Center Lock-on AF]
[ Eye-Start AF]
[ Pre-AF]
[Smile/Face Detect.]
[ Auto Obj. Framing]

[329] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

MF Assist (still image)

Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in
Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].

2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the
control wheel.

Note
You cannot use [ MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

[ MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier]
function instead.
 Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Camera
Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time].

[330] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Peaking Level

Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges using a specific color in Manual Focus or Direct Manual
Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Level] → desired setting.

Menu item details

High:
Sets the peaking level to high.
Mid:
Sets the peaking level to middle.
Low:
Sets the peaking level to low.
Off:
Does not use the peaking function.

Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the
subject and lens.

The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced when the product is connected using an HDMI cable.

[331] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Peaking Color

Sets the color used for the peaking function in Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Color] → desired setting.

Menu item details
Red:
Enhances outlines in red.
Yellow:
Enhances outlines in yellow.
White:
Enhances outlines in white.

[332] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Smile/Face Detect.

Detects the faces of your subjects and adjusts the focus, exposure, flash settings and performs
image processing automatically.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Smile/Face Detect.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not use the [Face Detection] function.
On (Regist. Faces):
Detects the registered face with higher priority using [Face Registration].
On:
Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.
Smile Shutter:
Automatically detects and shoots a smile.
Face Detection frame
When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product
determines that autofocus is enabled, the face detection frame turns white. When you press
the shutter button halfway down, the frame turns green.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the
product automatically selects the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that
face turns white. The face detection frames of other registered faces turn reddish-purple.
Tips for capturing smiles more effectively
Do not cover the eyes with front hair and keep the eyes narrowed.
Do not obscure the face by a hat, masks, sunglasses, etc.
Try to orient the face in front of the product and be as level as possible.
Give a clear smile with an open mouth. The smile is easier to be detected when the teeth
are shown.
If you press the shutter button during Smile Shutter, the product shoots the image. After
shooting, the product returns to Smile Shutter mode.

Hint
When the [Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [Smile Shutter], you can select the Smile Detection
Sensitivity from [On: Slight Smile], [On: Normal Smile] and [On: Big Smile].

Note
You cannot use the Face Detection function with the following functions:
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom
[Sweep Panorama]
[Picture Effect] is set to [Posterization].
When using the [Focus Magnifier] function.
[Scene Selection] is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene], [Sunset].
[ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].

Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.

The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some
conditions.

If the product cannot detect a face, set the Smile Detection Sensitivity.

If you track a face using [Lock-on AF] while executing Smile Shutter function, Smile Detection is
performed only for that face.

[333] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Face Registration (New Registration)

If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when
[Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)].

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].

2 Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.

3 When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.

Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is
obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.

[334] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given
priority. You can change the priority order.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].

2 Select a face to change the order of priority.

3 Select the destination.

[335] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Face Registration (Delete)

Deletes a registered face.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].

If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.

Note
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the
data for registered faces from the product, select [Delete All].

[336] List of MENU items Camera Settings1

Auto Obj. Framing (still image)

When this product detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are
tracked by [Lock-on AF], the product automatically trims the image into an appropriate
composition, and then saves it. Both the original and the trimmed images are saved. The
trimmed image is recorded in the same size as the original image size.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Auto Obj. Framing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not trim images.
Auto:
Automatically trims images into an appropriate composition.

Note
[ Auto Obj. Framing] is not available when the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama],
[Movie], or [Movie/S&Q Motion], or when [Scene Selection] is set to [Hand-held Twilight], [Sports
Action], or [Anti Motion Blur].

The trimmed image may not be the best possible composition, depending on the shooting conditions.

[ Auto Obj. Framing] cannot be set when [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
 [ Auto Obj. Framing] is not available in the following situations.
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], [Self-timer(Cont)], [Cont. Bracket], [Single Bracket], [WB
bracket], or [DRO Bracket].
The ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR].
[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
Other zoom functions than the optical zoom
When shooting in Manual Focus mode
[Picture Effect] is set to [Soft Focus], [HDR Painting], [Rich-tone Mono.], [Miniature], [Watercolor],
or [Illustration].

[337] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Movie/S&Q Motion

You can select the exposure mode for movie shooting or slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with [
S&Q Settings].

1 Turn the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).

2 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Movie/S&Q Motion] → desired setting.

3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE (movie) button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Program Auto / Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value).
Aperture Priority / Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority / Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure / Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value)
manually.
[338] List of MENU items Camera Settings2
File Format (movie)

Selects the movie file format.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

Menu item details

XAVC S 4K:
Records 4K movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate.
Audio: LPCM
One of the following kinds of memory card is needed to record movies with [ File Format]
set to [XAVC S 4K]:

Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo

Movies cannot be recorded in 100 Mbps or more.

SDHC / SDXC / microSDHC / microSDXC memory card (SD Speed Class 10, or UHS
Speed Class U1 or faster)

UHS Speed Class U3 is required to record at 100 Mbps or more.

[HDMI Info. Display] temporarily switches to [Off] when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S
4K].
Images will not appear on the monitor of the camera if you record movies while the camera
is connected to an HDMI device with [ File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K].
[Smile/Face Detect.] and [Center Lock-on AF] are temporarily set to [Off] when the camera
is connected to an HDMI device with [ File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K].
[Smile/Face Detect.], [Center Lock-on AF] and [ REC Control] are temporarily set to [Off]
when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Dual Video REC] is set to [On]. Even if
the camera is connected to an HDMI device, images will not be displayed on that device
while movie recording is in progress.

XAVC S HD:
Records HD movies in the XAVC S format. This format supports a high bit rate.
Audio: LPCM
One of the following kinds of memory card is needed to record movies with [ File Format]
set to [XAVC S HD]:
Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo

Movies cannot be recorded in 100 Mbps or more.

 SDHC / SDXC / microSDHC / microSDXC memory card (SD Speed Class10, or UHS
Speed Class U1 or faster)
UHS Speed Class U3 is required to record at 100 Mbps or more.

AVCHD:
Records HD movies in the AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV.
Audio: Dolby Digital
MP4:
Records MP4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets,
web uploads, email attachments, etc.
Audio: AAC

Hint
You can save images to a computer or copy them to a disc compatible with your playback device
using the PlayMemories Home software.

Note
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the
movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.

When [ File Format] is set to [MP4], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie
file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop automatically.

[339] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Record Setting (movie)

Selects the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-
rate, the higher the image quality.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
Records high-definition movies by converting them into the MP4 file format using the MPEG-4
AVC/H.264 codec.

Bit-rate
Frame Rate
60 Mbps 100 Mbps
 30p/25p 30p 60M/25p 60M 30p 100M/25p 100M

24p 24p 60M * 24p 100M *

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]

Records high-definition movies by converting them into the MP4 file format using the MPEG-4
AVC/H.264 codec.

Bit-rate
Frame Rate
50 Mbps 60 Mbps 100 Mbps

120p/100p ― 120p 60M/100p 60M 120p 100M/100p 100M

60p/50p 60p 50M /50p 50M ― ―

30p/25p 30p 50M /25p 50M ― ―

24p 24p 50M * ― ―

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]

60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or
50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode with Dolby Digital audio and
in the AVCHD format.

24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible

devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode with Dolby
Digital audio and in the AVCHD format.

60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible

devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode with Dolby
Digital audio and in the AVCHD format.

Frame Bit-rate
Rate
17 Mbps 24 Mbps 28 Mbps

60i 17M(FH) /50i 60i 24M(FX) /50i

60i/50i ―
17M(FH) 24M(FX)

60p 28M(PS) /50p

60p/50p ― ―
28M(PS)

24p 17M(FH) /25p 24p 24M(FX) /25p

24p/25p ―
17M(FH) 24M(FX)
When [ File Format] is set to [MP4]
Movies are recorded in the MPEG-4 format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-
compatible devices), approximately 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices),
approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices), or approximately 25 frames/sec
(for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode with AAC audio and in the MP4 format.

Frame Bit-rate
Rate
6 Mbps 16 Mbps 28 Mbps

1080/60p 28M
60p/50p ― ―
/1080/50p 28M

720/30p 6M 1080/30p 16M

30p/25p ―
/720/25p 6M /1080/25p 16M

Note
Movies recorded with the [60p 28M(PS) ]/[50p 28M(PS) ]/[60i 24M(FX) ]/[50i 24M(FX)
]/[24p 24M(FX) ]/[25p 24M(FX) ] as the [ Record Setting] are converted by
PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. You cannot create a disc in the
original image quality. This conversion can take a long time. If you want to keep the original image
quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.

To play back 60p/50p/24p/25p movies on a TV, the TV must be compatible with the 60p/50p/24p/25p
format. If the TV is not compatible with the 60p/50p/24p/25p format, 60p/50p/24p/25p movies will be
output as 60i/50i movies.

[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.

[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]

The angle of view will be narrower under the following conditions:

When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set to [30p]/[25p]
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

[340] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

S&Q Settings

You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or
record a long-term phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For
example, you can record an intense sports scene, the moment when a bird starts to fly, a
blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky. Sound will not be recorded.

1 Set the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).

2 Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[Movie/S&Q Motion]→ and select the

desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion (S&Q) ( Program Auto,
Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual Exposure).

3 Select MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[ S&Q Settings] and select the desired
settings for [ Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].

4 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Menu item details

Record Setting:
Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate.
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [ Record Setting] and [
Frame Rate].
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Record Setting
Frame Rate
24p 30p 60p

120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower -

60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick

15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick

8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick

4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick

2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick

1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL

Record Setting
Frame Rate
25p 50p

100fps 4 times slower -

50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed

25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick

12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick

6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick

3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick

2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick

1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick

When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set [ Record Setting] to
[60p]/[50p].

Note
In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the
proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a
higher value.

For an estimation of recordable time, refer to "Recordable movie times."

The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for [ Frame Rate] and [
Record Setting].

The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format.

During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.

[Dual Video REC]
[TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]
[ TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]
[ 4K Output Sel.]
[341] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Dual Video REC

Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie
and an MP4 movie.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dual Video REC] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
An XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie, are recorded
simultaneously.
Off:
The [Dual Video REC] function is not used.

Note
When [ Record Setting] for an XAVC S movie is set to [60p]/[50p] or [120p]/[100p], [ Record
Setting] for an AVCHD movie is set to [60p]/[50p], or [ File Format] is set to [MP4], [Dual Video
REC] is set to [Off].

If you select [Date View] in [View Mode] when playing back movies, XAVC S movies and MP4
movies, or AVCHD movies and MP4 movies are displayed side-by-side.

[342] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

AF drive speed (movie)

You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF drive speed] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Fast:
Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as
sports.
Normal:
Sets the AF drive speed to normal.
Slow:
Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject
to be focused is changed.
[343] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

AF Track Sens (movie)

You can set the AF sensitivity in movie mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ AF Track Sens]→desired setting.

Menu item details

Responsive:
Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject
is moving quickly.
Standard:
Sets the AF sensitivity to normal. This mode is useful when there are obstacles in front of the
subject or in crowded places.

[344] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Auto Slow Shut. (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the
subject is dark.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shut.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark
locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in
dark locations.
Off:
Does not use [ Auto Slow Shut.]. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is
selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Note
[ Auto Slow Shut.] does not function in the following situations:
 During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)

When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]

[345] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Audio Recording

Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the
sounds of the lens and the camera operating.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.

[346] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].

2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.

Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level.
Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower
volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make the sound easier to hear.

Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.

[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.

[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the
(microphone) terminal input.

[347] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.

Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.
[348] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Wind Noise Reduct.

Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from
the built-in microphone.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.

Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be
recorded with too low volume.

When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [On] does not function.

[349] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Marker Display (movie)

Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on the monitor or the
viewfinder while shooting movies.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.
 Note
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to (Movie/S&Q Motion) or when shooting
movies.

You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].

The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)

[350] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
[Off]/[On]
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a
general household TV.
[Off]/[80%]/[90%]
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or
perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/[On]

Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.

Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.

[351] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Silent Shooting (still image)

You can shoot images without the shutter sound.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Silent Shooting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
You can shoot images without the shutter sound.
Off:
[ Silent Shooting] is deactivated.

Note
Use the [ Silent Shooting] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration
to the privacy and portrait rights of the subject.

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.

When shooting still images using the [ Silent Shooting] function with low ISO sensitivity, if you
point the camera at a very bright light source, high intensity areas on the monitor may be recorded in
darker tones.

When the power is turned off, the shutter sound may beep in rare occasions. This is not a
malfunction.

Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur.

If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from
other cameras or fluorescent lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.

If you want to turn off the beep that sounds when the subject is in focus or the self-timer operates,
set [Audio signals] to [Off].

Even if [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the shutter sound may beep under the following
circumstances:
[White Balance] is set to [Custom Setup]
[Face Registration]

You cannot select [ Silent Shooting] when the mode dial is set to other than P/A/S/M.

When [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Auto HDR
Picture Effect
Picture Profile
Long Exposure NR
e-Front Curtain Shut.
S. Auto Img. Extract.
BULB shooting
Multi Frame NR
 When [ Silent Shooting] is set to [On], only [Continuous Shooting: Lo] is available for [Cont.
Shooting].

When shooting using a function downloaded from PlayMemories Camera Apps, [ Silent Shooting]
is canceled. To reactivate [ Silent Shooting], first launch an application, then select MENU → [
Silent Shooting] ([ Silent Shooting] cannot be used with some applications).

After you turn the camera on, the time in which you can start recording is extended by approximately
0.5 seconds.

[352] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

e-Front Curtain Shut.

The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between shutter releases.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [e-Front Curtain Shut.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Off:
Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.

Note
When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large diameter lens attached, the ghosting of a blurred
area may occur, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. In such cases, set this function to
[Off].

When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set
this function to [Off]. If you set this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image
brightness will be uneven.

When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on
the shooting environment. In such cases, set [e-Front Curtain Shut.] to [Off].

[353] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Release w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to
an astronomical telescope, etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.

Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such
as the lens of an astronomical telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it
on the recorded image.

[354] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Release w/o Card

Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.

Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.

The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.

[355] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Uses [SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [SteadyShot].
We recommend that you set [Off] when using a tripod.

[356] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

SteadyShot Settings

You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → [On].

2 [SteadyShot Settings] → [SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the
attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.].
(8mm-1000mm)
Check the focal-length index (A) and set the focal-length.

Note
 The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after
you point the camera towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way
down without stopping halfway.

When using a tripod, make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any
malfunction when shooting.

[SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU→ (Camera Settings2)→[SteadyShot] is

set to [Off].

When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does
not work correctly. Set [SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [SteadyS. Focal Len.] to match the
lens you are using. The current set value of the SteadyShot focal length will display to the side of
.

When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [SteadyShot Adjust.]
to [Manual] and set the focal length.

When you set [SteadyShot] to [On]/[Off], the SteadyShot settings of the camera and lens switch at
the same time.

If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that
switch on the lens. You cannot switch the settings using the camera.

[357] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of
the optical zoom.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → [On:ClearImage Zoom] or

[On:Digital Zoom].

2 When a power zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever or the zoom ring of the
zoom lens to enlarge subjects.

When you exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom, the camera automatically
switches to another zoom than the optical zoom.

3 When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, select MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom] → desired value.

Press the center of the control wheel to exit.

 You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired button by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)].

[358] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Zoom Setting

You can select the zoom setting of the product.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [
Image Size] to [M] or [S].
On:ClearImage Zoom:
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom,
the product magnifies images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate
significantly.
On:Digital Zoom:
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to
the largest scale. However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does
not deteriorate.

[359] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction.
Available only
with power zoom lenses that support this function.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.

Menu item details
Left(W)/Right(T):
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed
rotation.
Right(W)/Left(T):
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed
rotation.

[360] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in
shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] or [Finder] →

desired setting → [Enter].

The items marked with are available.

Menu item details

Graphic Display :
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions.
When the product is level in both directions, the indicator turns to green.
For viewfinder*:
Displays information suited for shooting with the viewfinder.
* This screen mode is available only in the setting for [Monitor].

Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.

The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the
level.

[361] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

FINDER/MONITOR

Sets the method for switching the display between Electronic Viewfinder and the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you look into the Electronic Viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched
to the Electronic Viewfinder automatically.
Viewfinder(Manual):
The screen is turned off and the image is displayed only in the Electronic Viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The Electronic Viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the screen.

Hint
You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key.

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to the

preferred key.
 To turn off automatic switching of the display using the eye sensor, set [FINDER/MONITOR] to
[Viewfinder(Manual)] or [Monitor(Manual)].

[362] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Finder Frame Rate (still image)

Display the subject's movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder
during still image shooting. This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) →[ Finder Frame Rate] → desired setting.

This function can be assigned to button of your choice using [Custom Key(Shoot.)].

Menu item details

120fps/100fps:
Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
60fps/50fps:
Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.

Note
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], the resolution of the viewfinder is lowered.

[ Finder Frame Rate] is locked to [60fps]/[50fps] in the following modes:

During playback
During movie shooting
During HDMI connection

[363] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Zebra

The zebra pattern will appear over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the
IRE level that you set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zebra] → desired setting.

Menu item details
Off:
Does not display the zebra pattern.
70/75/80/85/90/95/100/100+/Custom1/Custom2:
Adjusts the brightness level.

Hint
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness
level for [Zebra]. The settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are
registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively in the default settings.

To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The
zebra pattern will appear on areas that fall within the range you set.

To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will
appear over areas with a brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.

Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed during HDMI connection.

[364] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Grid Line

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the
composition of images.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-
balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is suitable
to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or duplicated
images.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.

[365] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Exposure Set. Guide

You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Displays the guide.

[366] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Live View Display

Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white
balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect] on the screen.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Setting Effect ON:
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying
all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the
results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative
Style], or [Picture Effect]. When this setting is used, you can easily check the image
composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.

When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the icon is displayed on the Live View screen.

Note
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Movie/S&Q Motion]
[Scene Selection]

When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be
the same as that of the displayed Live View.

Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some
shutter speed settings. When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will
be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the composition.

[367] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Auto Review

You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the
display time for Auto Review.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.

Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time.
If you perform a magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the
magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.
 Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be
displayed temporarily, followed by the image after processing.

The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.

[368] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Custom Key(Shoot.)/Custom Key(PB)

You can assign a desired function to a desired key.

Some functions are available only when they are assigned to a custom key. For example, if you
assign [Eye AF] to [Center Button] for [Custom Key(Shoot.)], you can easily recall [Eye AF]
simply by pressing the center of the control wheel while shooting.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Custom Key(Shoot.)] or [Custom Key(PB)].

2 Select the key to which you want to assign the function on the selection screen.

The keys that can be assigned functions are different for [Custom Key(Shoot.)] and
[Custom Key(PB)].

You can assign the desired functions to the following keys.

1. Custom Button 2
2. Custom Button 1
3. AF/MF Button/AEL Button
4. Fn/ Button
5. Control Wheel (Center Button/Down Button/Left Button/Right Button)
6. Custom Button 3

You can also assign a shooting function to the focus hold button on the lens. However,
some lenses do not have a focus hold button.
 3 Select the function to be assigned.

The functions that can be assigned differ depending on the keys.

[369] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Function Menu Set.

You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.] → set a function to the

desired location.

The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.

[370] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Dial/Wheel Setup

You can switch the functions of the control dial and the control wheel.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Setup] → desired setting.

Menu item details

SS F/no.:
You can change the shutter speed using the control wheel, and change the aperture value
using the control dial.
F/no. SS:
You can change the aperture value using the control wheel, and change the shutter speed
using the control dial.

Note
 [Dial/Wheel Setup] is enabled when the shooting mode is set to “M.”

[371] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Dial/Wheel Ev Comp

You can adjust the exposure compensation using the control dial or the control wheel.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial/Wheel Ev Comp] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial or control wheel.
Wheel:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control wheel.
Dial:
Assigns the exposure compensation function to the control dial.

Note
If you assign the exposure compensation function to the control dial, the function that was originally
assigned can be managed using the control wheel, and vice versa.

When the shooting mode is set to [Manual Exposure] and ISO is set to [ISO AUTO], [Dial/Wheel Ev
Comp] is disabled.

[372] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

MOVIE Button

Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [MOVIE Button] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Always:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
Movie Mode Only:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to
[Movie/S&Q Motion] mode.

[373] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Dial / Wheel Lock

You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn (Function)
button.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Dial / Wheel Lock] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Lock:
Locks the control dial and control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control dial or control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function)
button.

Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

[374] List of MENU items Camera Settings2

Audio signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

1 MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.

Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.

[375] List of MENU items Wireless

Send to Smartphone

You can transfer still images/movies to a smartphone and view them. The application
PlayMemories Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.

If you press the (Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting screen
for [Send to Smartphone] will appear.

2 If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the
product. Connect the smartphone and the product using that information.

The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending
on the smartphone.

Menu item details

Select on This Device:
Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All Images on This Date] or [Multiple Images].

The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.

(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control
wheel, then press MENU → [Enter].
Select on Smartphone:
Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.

Note
You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.

You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For Android smartphone
Start PlayMemories Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
For iPhone/iPad
Select PlayMemories Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image
Size].

Some images may not be displayed on the smartphone depending on the recording format.

RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.

You cannot send XAVC S or AVCHD format movies.

This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has
permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product,
reset the connection information by following these steps. MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi
Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the
smartphone again.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set
[Airplane Mode] to [Off].

[376] List of MENU items Wireless

Send to Computer

You can transfer images stored in the product to a computer connected to a wireless access
point or wireless broadband router and easily make backup copies using this operation. Before
starting this operation, install PlayMemories Home on your computer and register the access
point on the product.

1 Start your computer.

2 MENU → (Wireless) → [Send to Computer].

Note
Depending on the application settings of your computer, the product will turn off after saving the
 images to your computer.

You can transfer images from the product to only one computer at a time.

If you want to transfer images to another computer, connect the product and the computer via a USB
connection and follow the instructions in PlayMemories Home.

When you save images to the Mac computer using Wi-Fi function, use "Wireless Auto Import."

[377] List of MENU items Wireless

View on TV

You can view images on a network-enabled TV by transferring them from the product without
connecting the product and TV with a cable. For some TVs, you may need to perform
operations on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [View on TV] → desired device to be connected.

2 When you want to play back images using slideshow, press the center of the control
wheel.

To display the next/previous image manually, press the right/left sides of the control
wheel.
To change the device to be connected, press the down side of the control wheel, then
select [Device list].

Slideshow settings
You can change the slideshow settings by pressing the down side of the control wheel.
Playback Selection:
Selects the group of images to be shown.
Folder View(Still):
Selects from [All] and [All in Folder].
Date View:
Selects from [All] and [All in Date Rng.].
Interval:
Selects from [Short] and [Long].
Effects*:
Selects from [On] and [Off].
Playback Image Size:
Selects from [HD] and [4K].
* The settings are effective only for BRAVIA TV which is compatible with the functions.

Note
You can use this function on a TV that supports DLNA renderer.

You can view images on a Wi-Fi Direct-enabled TV or network-enabled TV (including wired network-
enabled TVs).

If you connect TV and this product and do not use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to register your access
point first.

Displaying the images on the TV may take time.

Movies cannot be shown on a TV via Wi-Fi. Use an HDMI cable (sold separately).

[378] List of MENU items Wireless

Calling up an application using [One-touch(NFC)]

You can call up a desired application from the application menu of this product by touching an
NFC-enabled Android smartphone to the product. If the application you call up has a feature
that works with the smartphone, the product and the smartphone will be connected via Wi-Fi.
To
use this function, register the desired application in advance.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [One-touch(NFC)] → desired application.

2 Switch this product to shooting mode, then touch an NFC-enabled smartphone to

the (N mark) on the product for 1-2 seconds.

PlayMemories Mobile launches on the smartphone, and the application you have
registered launches on this product.

Note
When the product is in playback mode, the registered application will not launch even if you touch
the smartphone to the product.
 When you call up an application with one touch, even if that application does not work with a
smartphone, PlayMemories Mobile on smartphone will launch. Exit PlayMemories Mobile without
performing an operation. If you do not exit PlayMemories Mobile, the smartphone stays in standby
connection status.

[Smart Remote Embedded] is assigned to [One-touch(NFC)] as a default setting.

[379] List of MENU items Wireless

Airplane Mode

When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions
including Wi-Fi.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.

If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.

[380] List of MENU items Wireless

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access
point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.

1 MENU → (Wireless) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].

2 Press the WPS button on the access point you want to register.

Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your
access point supports the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set
to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method,
perform [Access Point Set.].

For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point
operating instructions or contact the administrator of the access point.
 A connection may not be enabled depending on the surrounding conditions, such as the type of wall
material or if there is an obstruction or poor wireless signal between the product and access point. If
that happens, change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.

[381] List of MENU items Wireless

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID
name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in
some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access
point administrator.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].

2 Select the access point you want to register.

When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access
point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting]
and set the access point.

If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the
security system.

3 Input the password, and select [OK].

 Access points without the mark do not require a password.

4 Select [OK].

Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more
items.

WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway:
When you set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter the IP address to match your network
environment.

Note
To give the registered access point priority, set [Priority Connection] to [On].

[382] List of MENU items Wireless

Wi-Fi Settings: Disp MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of this product.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Disp MAC Address].

[383] List of MENU items Wireless

Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset

This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [Smart Remote
Embedded] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that
is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].

Note
If you connect this product to the smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must
register the smartphone again.

[384] List of MENU items Wireless

Bluetooth Settings

Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone via a Bluetooth connection.
You need to pair the camera and smartphone before using the location information interlocking
function.
If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information
interlocking function, refer to “Loc. Info. Link Set..”

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Bluetooth Function (On/Off):
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone using PlayMemories Mobile.
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.
[385] List of MENU items Wireless

Loc. Info. Link Set.

You can use the application PlayMemories Mobile to obtain location information from a
smartphone that is connected with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can
record the obtained location information when shooting images.

Preparation in advance

To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application PlayMemories
Mobile is required.
If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of PlayMemories Mobile, you
need to perform the following steps beforehand.

1. Install PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone.

You can install PlayMemories Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If
you have already installed the application, update it to the latest version.

2. Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function
of the camera.

After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location
Information Linkage” will appear on the top page of the application.

Operating procedure

: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera

1. : Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.

Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In
steps 2 to 7, the pairing operation is performed using the camera and the application
PlayMemories Mobile.
If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in
step 1, cancel the pairing and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2
through 7 using the camera and the application PlayMemories Mobile.

2. : On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth

Function] → [On].

3. : On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].

4. : Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information

 Linkage.”

If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in

advance” above.

5. : Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting

screen of PlayMemories Mobile.

6. : Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of

PlayMemories Mobile, and then select your camera from the list.

7. : Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.

Pairing of the camera and PlayMemories Mobile is complete.

8. : On the camera, select MENU → (Wireless) → [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location
Info. Link] → [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Location information obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded
when shooting images.

Menu item details

Location Info. Link:
Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.
Auto Time Correct.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a
linked smartphone.
Auto Area Adjust.:
Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a
linked smartphone.

Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location
information.
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not
established.

Hint
Location information can be linked when PlayMemories Mobile is running on your smartphone even if
the smartphone monitor is off.

When PlayMemories Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch
PlayMemories Mobile to resume location information linking.

In the application PlayMemories Home, you can view images on a map by importing images with
 location information to your computer. For details, refer to Help for PlayMemories Home.

If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and
perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in PlayMemories Mobile.
Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

For more detailed video instructions, refer to the following support page.
http://www.sony.net/pmm/btg/

Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To perform pairing again,
delete the pairing information for the camera registered in PlayMemories Mobile before trying again.

The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth
connection is disconnected.

The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with
that of only one smartphone. If you want to link the location information with that of another
smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of the smartphone that is already
linked.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from
between the camera and the paired smartphone.

When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage]
menu on PlayMemories Mobile.

Supported smartphones
Android smartphones: Android 5.0 or later and compatible with Bluetooth 4.0 or later*

iPhone/iPad: iPhone 4S or later/iPad 3rd generation or later

* As of October 2016. For the latest information, refer to the support site.
* For the Bluetooth version, refer to the website for your smartphone.

[386] List of MENU items Wireless

Edit Device Name

You can change the device name for the Wi-Fi Direct or Bluetooth connection.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Edit Device Name].

 2 Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].

[387] List of MENU items Wireless

Reset Network Set.

Resets all the network settings to default settings.

1 MENU → (Wireless) → [Reset Network Set.] → [OK].

[388] List of MENU items Application

Launching the downloaded application (Application

List)

Launch an application that has been downloaded from the application download website
PlayMemories Camera Apps.

1 MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → desired application to launch.

Hint
How to launch the applications faster
Assign [Download Appli.] and [Application List] to the custom key. You can launch the applications or
display application list only by pressing the custom key during the shooting information screen is
displayed.

[389] List of MENU items Application

Introduction

Displays information about services that you can download from PlayMemories Camera Apps.
 1 MENU → (Application) → [Introduction]

[390] List of MENU items Playback

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore
it. Confirm the image to be deleted beforehand.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The mark is
displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the
mark.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images in the selected date range.

Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.

To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing
the following procedure:
(Image Index) button → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired
folder or date using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.

The menu items that can be selected differ depending on the [View Mode] setting.
[391] List of MENU items Playback

Switching between still images and movies (View

Mode)

Sets the View Mode (image display method).

1 MENU → (Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
Folder View(MP4):
Displays only MP4-format movies.
AVCHD View:
Displays only AVCHD-format movies.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.

[392] List of MENU items Playback

Playing back images on the image index screen

(Image Index)

You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.

1 Press the (Image Index) button while the image is being played back.

2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or
turning the control wheel.

To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU → (Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

12 Images/30 Images

To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.

To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the
top/bottom sides of the control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the
calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing the center. In addition, you can switch
View Mode by selecting an icon.

[393] List of MENU items Playback

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display

Rotation)

Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the
orientation of the camera.
Manual:
A portrait image is displayed as a vertical image. If you have set the image orientation using the
[Rotate] function, the image will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Always displays in landscape orientation.

[394] List of MENU items Playback

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Automatically plays back images continuously.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.

2 Select [Enter].

Menu item details

Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product
exits the slideshow when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.

Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control
wheel.

You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].

[395] List of MENU items Playback

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Rotates a recorded still image counter-clockwise.

1 Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Rotate].

2 Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned
off.
 Note
You cannot rotate the movies.

You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.

When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original
orientation depending on the software.

[396] List of MENU items Playback

Enlarging an image being played back (Playback

zoom)

Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.

1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the button.

Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale.

By rotating the control dial, you can switch to the previous or next image while keeping
the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during
shooting. If the focus location information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in
on the center of the image.

2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of
the control wheel.

3 Press the MENU button, or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.

Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move
the magnified position on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to other than [Off] beforehand.

Note
You cannot enlarge movies.
[397] List of MENU items Playback

Protecting images (Protect)

Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The mark is displayed on

protected images.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Applies or cancels the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The mark
is displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the
mark.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images in the selected date range.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected date range.

Note
The menu items that can be selected differ depending on the [View Mode] setting.

[398] List of MENU items Playback

Specify Printing (Specify Printing)

You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later.
The (print order) icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print
Order Format.”
DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this
setting after printing.

1 MENU → (Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again and delete the mark.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select several images in the date range or in the
folder, select the check box of the date or the folder.
(3) MENU → [OK].

Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the
printer.

Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
RAW images

The number of images to be printed cannot be specified.

Some printers do not support the date print function.

[399] List of MENU items Playback

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause
the movie during playback to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting
still images, and save them as still images.

1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.

 2 MENU → (Playback) → select [Photo Capture].

3 Play back the movie and pause it.

4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback,
displays the next frame, and displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.

5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.

The scene is saved as a still image.

[400] List of MENU items Setup

Monitor Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual]
for indoor shooting.

The monitor brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum brightness will
be [±0].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

The monitor brightness is locked at [-2] when shooting a movie using the Wi-Fi functions.
[401] List of MENU items Setup
Viewfinder Bright.

When using an electronic viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the electronic
viewfinder according to the surrounding environment.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Adjusts the brightness automatically.
Manual:
Selects the brightness of the electronic viewfinder from the range –2 to +2.

Note
The electronic viewfinder brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum
brightness will be [±0].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K].
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

You cannot use the viewfinder while using Wi-Fi functions. The camera will switch to screen display
mode.

When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], [Viewfinder Bright.] cannot be set to [Auto].
[Viewfinder Bright.] can only be set to [Manual].

[402] List of MENU items Setup

Finder Color Temp.

Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,”
it changes to a colder color.

[403] List of MENU items Setup

Gamma Disp. Assist

Movies with S-Log gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of
the wide dynamic range. They are therefore displayed in low contrast during shooting and may
be difficult to monitor, using [Gamma Disp. Assist], contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma
can be reproduced. In addition, [Gamma Disp. Assist] can also be applied when playing back
movies on the camera's monitor/viewfinder.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Gamma Disp. Assist].

2 Select the desired setting using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

Menu item details

Off:
Does not apply [Gamma Disp. Assist].
Auto:
Displays movies with an [S-Log2→709(800%)] effect when the gamma set in [Picture Profile] is
[S-Log2], and with an [S-Log3→709(800%)] effect when the gamma is set to [S-Log3].
S-Log2→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log2 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays movies with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).

Note
When [Gamma Disp. Assist] is set to [Auto] during playback, the picture is displayed based on the
current gamma setting in [Picture Profile] instead of auto-detecting the gamma value of the movie.

[Gamma Disp. Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the
camera.

[404] List of MENU items Setup

Volume Settings
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.

Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation
panel, then adjust the volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

[405] List of MENU items Setup

Upload Settings (Eye-Fi)

Sets whether to use the upload function when using an Eye-Fi card (commercially available).
This item appears when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into the product’s memory card slot.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Upload Settings] → desired setting.

2 Set your Wi-Fi network or destination on the Eye-Fi card.

For details, refer to the manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.

3 Insert the Eye-Fi card you have set up into the product, and shoot still images.

Images are transferred to your computer, etc., automatically via the Wi-Fi network.

Menu item details

On:
Enables the upload function.
Off:
Disables the upload function.
Communication status screen display
: Standby. No images are to be sent.
: Upload standby
: Connecting
: Uploading
: Error
 Note
Eye-Fi cards are only sold in certain countries/regions.

For more information on Eye-Fi cards, please contact the manufacturer or vendor directly.

Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countries/regions where they were purchased. Use Eye-Fi
cards in accordance with the law of the countries/regions where you purchased the card.

Eye-Fi cards are equipped with a wireless LAN function. Do not insert an Eye-Fi card into the product
in locations in which their use is prohibited, such as on an airplane. When an Eye-Fi card is inserted
into the product, set [Upload Settings] to [Off]. When the upload function is set to [Off], the
indicator will be displayed on the product.

Power save mode will not function during uploading.

If (error) is displayed, remove the memory card and reinsert it, or turn the product off and then
on again. If the indicator appears again, the Eye-Fi card may be damaged.

Wireless LAN communication may be influenced by other communication devices. If the

communication status is poor, move closer to the access point to be connected.

Third parties may know where you shot the image if you upload the image when [ Loc. Info. Link
Set.] → [Location Info. Link] is set to [On]. To prevent third parties from obtaining your location
information, set [ Loc. Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] to [Off].

This product does not support Eye-Fi “Endless Memory Mode.” Before using an Eye-Fi card, be sure
that “Endless Memory Mode” is turned off.

When you use a new Eye-Fi card for the first time, copy the installation file on the Eye-Fi card to your
computer before formatting the Eye-Fi card.

Update the firmware of an Eye-Fi card to the latest version before using the Eye-Fi card. For details,
refer to the manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.

For details on files you can upload, refer to the manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.

[406] List of MENU items Setup

Tile Menu

Selects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU
button.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Tile Menu] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Always displays the first screen of the menu (Tile Menu).
Off:
Deactivates the Tile Menu display.

[407] List of MENU items Setup

Mode Dial Guide

You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change
the settings available for that shooting mode.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Mode Dial Guide] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the Mode Dial Guide.
Off:
Does not display the Mode Dial Guide.

[408] List of MENU items Setup

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the delete
confirmation screen.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.
[409] List of MENU items Setup

Display Quality

You can change the display quality.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.

Menu item details

High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.

Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.

[410] List of MENU items Setup

Pwr Save Start Time

Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing
operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an
operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Pwr Save Start Time] → desired setting.

Menu item details

30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec

Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.

When using a lens with power zoom, the lens is retracted one minute after the product stops
operation if [Pwr Save Start Time] is set to [10 Sec].

The power save function is not activated when power is being supplied via USB, when playing back
slideshows, when recording movies, or when connected to a computer or TV.
[411] List of MENU items Setup

Auto Pwr OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting.
When it is set to [High], you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera
gets hotter than normal.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Auto Pwr OFF Temp.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard:
Sets the standard temperature at which the camera turns off.
High:
Sets a higher temperature than the standard at which the camera turns off.
Notes when [Auto Pwr OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-
temperature burns.

Continuous recording time for movies when [Auto Pwr OFF Temp.] is set to
[High]
The following values are the continuous times from when the camera starts recording until the
camera stops recording.

Ambient temperature: 20°C (68°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 29 minutes
Ambient temperature: 30°C (86°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 29 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 20 minutes
HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M, not connected via Wi-Fi)
4K: XAVC S 4K (24p 60M, not connected via Wi-Fi)

Note
Even if [Auto Pwr OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the
camera, the recordable time for movies may not change.
[412] List of MENU items Setup

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]

Note
If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video system, a
message telling you that you must reformat the card will appear.
If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another memory card.

When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a
message "Running on NTSC." or "Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.

[413] List of MENU items Setup

Cleaning Mode

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part
that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image,
depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the
image sensor.

1 Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.

2 MENU → (Setup) → [Cleaning Mode] → [Enter].

The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.

3 Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.

4 Detach the lens.

5 Use the blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.

6 Attach the lens.

Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning
methods, please refer to the following URL.
http://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php

Note
Clean the image sensor quickly.

A blower is not supplied with this product. Use a commercially available blower.

Cleaning can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery icons) or more.
The use of an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor is recommended.

Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.

Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower
does not touch the image sensor.

Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.

Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.

When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too
hard, the inside of the product may be damaged.

If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.
[414] List of MENU items Setup

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations,"
and touch operations when shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad
operations."

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Touch Panel+Pad:
Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad
operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only:
Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only:
Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Off:
Deactivates all touch operations.

Note
Touch pad operations cannot be used with applications downloaded from PlayMemories Camera
Apps.

[415] List of MENU items Setup

Touch Pad Area Set.

Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder. You can
prevent unintentional operations caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Pad Area Set.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Whole Screen:
Uses the entire monitor as the touch pad.
Right 1/2 Area:
Uses only the right half of the monitor as the touch pad.
Right 1/4 Area:
Uses only the right quarter of the monitor as the touch pad.

[416] List of MENU items Setup

Demo Mode

The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically
(demonstration), when the camera has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select
[Off].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Demo Mode] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The movie playback demonstration starts automatically if the product is not operated for about
one minute. Only protected AVCHD movies can be played back.
Set the view mode to [AVCHD View], and protect the movie file with the oldest recorded date
and time.
Off:
Does not show the demonstration.

Note
You can set this item only when the product is powered by the AC Adaptor (supplied).

Even if [On] is selected, the product does not start a demonstration if there is no movie file on the
memory card.

When [On] is selected, the product does not switch to power save mode.

[417] List of MENU items Setup

TC/UB Settings

The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to
movies.
 1 MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.

Menu item details

TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29
* When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23
frames.
When [50i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24

3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the
control wheel.

How to reset the time code

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00).
You can also reset the time code (00:00:00:00) using the RMT-VP1K remote commander (sold
separately).

How to set the user bit (UB Preset)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].

2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the
control wheel.

How to reset the user bit

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].

2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).

How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format*1)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].

DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will
occur during extended periods of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately
29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make the time code and actual time equal. In drop
frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time code without
this correction is called non-drop frame.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.

How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].

Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is
recorded sequentially from the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera
operation.

The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the
time code advances in [Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.

How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)

1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].

Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the
new time code consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec Run]
mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.

[418] List of MENU items Setup

Remote Ctrl

You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2SEC button (2
second delay shutter), and START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the
Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold
separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Wireless Remote Commander.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Remote Ctrl] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Allows remote commander operation.
Off:
Does not allow remote commander operation.

Note
The lens or lens hood may block the remote sensor that receive the signals. Use the remote
commander in the position from which the signal can reach the product.

When [Remote Ctrl] is set to [On], the product does not switch to power save mode. Set [Off] after
using a remote commander.

[419] List of MENU items Setup

HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI
cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or
[2160p/1080p], based on which TV is to be connected.

[420] List of MENU items Setup

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080

60i compatible models)

Set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [ Record Setting] is set to [24p
24M(FX) ], [24p 17M(FH) ], [24p 50M ].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or

[2160p/1080p].

2 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.

Menu item details

60p:
Movies are output as 60p.
24p:
Movies are output as 24p.

Note
Steps 1 and 2 can be set in either order.

When [ Record Setting] is set to other than [24p 24M(FX) ], [24p 17M(FH) ], or [24p 50M
], this setting is canceled, and HDMI video is output according to the [HDMI Resolution] settings.

[421] List of MENU items Setup

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected
using an HDMI cable (sold separately).

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is
displayed on the camera’s monitor.

Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting
information are displayed on the camera’s monitor.

Note
When this product is connected to a 4K-compatible TV, [Off] is selected automatically.

[422] List of MENU items Setup

HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)

Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI
terminal when outputting the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the
time code information as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected
device can then refer to the digital data to recognize the time data.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.

Note
When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording
device. In such cases, set [ TC Output] to [Off].
[423] List of MENU items Setup

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the
recorder/player to start/stop recording using the camera.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop
recording.

Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [ REC Control].

When [ TC Output] is [Off], [ REC Control] is set to [Off].

Even when is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the
settings or status of the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before
use.

[424] List of MENU items Setup

HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI

When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.

2 Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.

 The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on
the TV screen.

3 Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.

4 Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.

Menu item details

On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU
operation differs depending on the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the TV.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product
is connected to another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU → (Setup)
→ [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

[425] List of MENU items Setup

4K Output Sel. (movie)

You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to
4K-compatible external recording/playback devices, etc.

1 Turn the mode dial to (Movie/S&Q Motion).

2 Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.

 3 MENU → (Setup) → [ 4K Output Sel.] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s
memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the
camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(24p) :
Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the
camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only(25p) *:

Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the
camera’s memory card.
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.

Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible
device.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p) ] or [HDMI Only(25p) ] is set, [HDMI Info. Display]
will temporarily be set to [Off].

A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-motion/quick-motion

shooting.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p) ] or [HDMI Only(25p) ] is set, the counter does not
move forward (the actual recording time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an
external recording/playback device.

When the camera is connected using an HDMI cable with [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], or
when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Dual Video REC] is set to [On], the following
functions are not available.
[Smile/Face Detect.]
[Lock-on AF] under [Focus Area]
[Center Lock-on AF]
[Eye AF]

[426] List of MENU items Setup

USB Connection

Selects the appropriate USB connection method for each computer or USB device connected to
this product.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or
other USB devices to be connected.
Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are
connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB
devices.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique
functions are enabled for use.

PC Remote:
Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such
functions as shooting and storing images on the computer.

Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB
Connection] is set to [Auto].

[427] List of MENU items Setup

USB LUN Setting

Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.
[428] List of MENU items Setup

USB Power Supply

Sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a
computer or an USB device.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.

Menu item details

On:
Power is supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a
computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a
computer, etc. If you use the supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off] is
selected.

Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.

[429] List of MENU items Setup

PC Remote Settings: Still Img. Save Dest.

Sets whether to save still images stored in both the camera and the computer during PC
Remote shooting. This setting is useful when you want to check recorded images on the
camera without leaving the camera.
* PC Remote: Uses "Remote Camera Control" to control this product from the computer, including such functions
as shooting and storing images on the computer.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [Still Img. Save Dest.] → desired
setting.

Menu item details

PC Only:
Saves still images only on the computer.
PC+Camera:
Saves still images on the computer and the camera.
 Note
During PC Remote shooting, you cannot change settings for [Still Img. Save Dest.]. Adjust the
settings before you start shooting.

If you insert a memory card that is not recordable, you cannot shoot still images even if you select
[PC+Camera].

If you select [PC+Camera] and you have not inserted a memory card into the camera, you cannot
release the shutter even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

While you are playing back still images on the camera, you cannot shoot using PC Remote.

[430] List of MENU items Setup

PC Remote Settings: RAW+J PC Save Img

Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer in PC Remote shooting.
When shooting still images using PC Remote, the application on the computer does not display
the image until the image has been completely transferred. When performing RAW+JPEG
shooting, you can accelerate the display processing speed by transferring only JPEG images
instead of transferring both RAW and JPEG images.
* PC Remote: Uses "Remote Camera Control" to control this product from the computer, including such functions
as shooting and storing images on the computer.
1 MENU → (Setup) → [PC Remote Settings] → [RAW+J PC Save Img] → desired
setting.

Menu item details

RAW & JPEG:
Transfers both RAW and JPEG files to the computer.
JPEG Only:
Transfers only JPEG files to the computer.
RAW Only:
Transfers only RAW files to the computer.

Note
[RAW+J PC Save Img] can be set only when [ Quality] is set to [RAW & JPEG].

[431] List of MENU items Setup

Language 

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.

[432] List of MENU items Setup

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time
or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when
setting the date and time after the first time.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.

Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the
product for 24 hours or more with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be
worn out. Consult your service facility.

[433] List of MENU items Setup

Area Setting

Sets the area where you are using the product.

 1 MENU → (Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.

[434] List of MENU items Setup

Copyright Info

Writes copyright information onto the still images.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.

2 When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the
screen. Enter your desired name.

Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], an icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.

Note
You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright].
You can enter up to 46 letters.

A icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.

In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and
[Set Copyright] columns before lending out or handing over your camera.

Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].

[435] List of MENU items Setup

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format
the card using the camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting
permanently erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on
a computer, etc.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Format].

Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1
to M4).

The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp
is lit up.

Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the
memory card may not be usable depending on the format type.

It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.

You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.

[436] List of MENU items Setup

File Number

Selects how to assign file numbers to recorded still images and MP4 movies.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [File Number] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Series:
The product will assign numbers to files sequentially up to "9999" without resetting.
Reset:
The product resets numbers when a file is recorded in a new folder and assigns numbers to
files starting with "0001".
(When the recording folder contains a file, a number one higher than the largest number is
assigned.)
[437] List of MENU items Setup

Set File Name

You can specify the first three characters of the file name for images you shoot.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Set File Name].

2 Select the entry field for the file name to display a keyboard on the screen, and then
enter three characters of your choice.

Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be entered. However, an underscore cannot be
used as the first character.

The three characters of the file name you specify using [Set File Name] will only be applied to
images you shoot after changing the setting.

[438] List of MENU items Setup

Select REC Folder

If [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the
folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

1 MENU→ (Setup)→[Select REC Folder]→desired folder.

Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] is set to [Date Form].

[439] List of MENU items Setup

New Folder

Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images and MP4 movies. A new
folder is created with a folder number one greater than the largest folder number currently used.
Images are recorded in the newly created folder. A folder for still images and a folder for MP4
movies that have the same number are created at the same time.

1 MENU→ (Setup)→[New Folder].

Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot
images, a new folder may be automatically created.

Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new
folder may be automatically created.

[440] List of MENU items Setup

Folder Name

Still images are recorded in a folder that is automatically created inside the DCIM folder on the
memory card. You can change the way folder names are assigned.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Folder Name] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Standard Form:
The folder name form is as follows: folder number + MSDCF.
Example: 100MSDCF
Date Form:
The folder name form is as follows: folder number + Y (the last digit)/MM/DD.
Example: 10060405(Folder number: 100, date: 04/05/2016)

Note
You cannot change the [Folder Name] settings for movies.
[441] List of MENU items Setup

Recover Image DB

If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In
such cases, the images on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these
problems happen, repair the file using [Recover Image DB].

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].

Note
Use a sufficiently charged battery pack. Low battery power during repairing can cause damage to
data.

[442] List of MENU items Setup

Display Media Info.

Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number
of recordable still images for the inserted memory card.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Display Media Info.].

[443] List of MENU items Setup

Version

Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this
product’s software are released, etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with software updates is attached.
Also displays the version of the adaptor if an adaptor compatible with software updates is
attached.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Version].

 Note
Updating can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery bars) or more.
The use of a sufficiently charged battery or the AC Adaptor (sold separately) is recommended.

[444] List of MENU items Setup

Certification Logo (For some models only)

Displays some of the certification logos for this product.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Certification Logo].

[445] List of MENU items Setup

Setting Reset

Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded
images are retained.

1 MENU → (Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.

Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.

Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.

When you perform [Initialize], downloaded applications on the product may be uninstalled. To use
these applications again, re-install them.

The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize]
is performed.
[446] Precautions/This product

Precautions

Refer also to "Notes on using your camera" in the Instruction Manual (supplied) for this product.

Backing up memory cards

Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.

When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned
off in the middle of a read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.

Database file error

If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and
turn on the power, the product automatically creates an image database file using some of the
memory card’s capacity. The process may take a long time and you cannot operate the product
until the process is completed.
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer using PlayMemories Home,
and then format the memory card using this product.

Do not use/store the product in the following places

In an extremely hot, cold or humid place

In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and
this may cause a malfunction.

Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater

The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.

In a location subject to rocking vibration

Near strong magnetic place

In sandy or dusty places

Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to
malfunction, and in some cases this malfunction cannot be repaired.

In places with high humidity

This may cause the lens to mold.

On storing

Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent
dust or debris from getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it
to the camera.

Precaution on carrying

Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to
break.

On operating temperatures

Your product is designed for use under the temperatures between 0°C and 40°C (32 °F and 104
°F). Shooting in extremely cold or hot places that exceed this range is not recommended.

On moisture condensation

If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense
inside or outside the product. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the
product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm
location, first put it in a plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an
hour until the temperature of the product has reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture
to evaporate. Note that if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you
will be unable to record clear images.

On image data compatibility

This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard
established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).

Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images
recorded or edited with other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.

Notes on playing movies on other devices

XAVC S movies can be played back only on XAVC S-supported devices.

On the monitor, viewfinder and lens

Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a
malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor
stays wet, the surface of the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a
malfunction.
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the
lens with a soft cloth, etc.
Make sure not to bump the lens or subject it to force.
Do not carry the camera by the monitor.
When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects
caught in the lens.
 Notes on the flash

Do not cover the flash with your fingers.

Do not carry the product by the flash unit, or use excessive strength on it.
If water, dust or sand get into the open flash unit, it may cause a malfunction.
When pushing down the flash unit, be careful not to catch your fingers.

Notes on discarding or transferring this product to others

When discarding or transferring this product to others, make sure to perform the following
operation to protect private information.

Select [Setting Reset] → [Initialize] → [OK] → [OK].

Notes on location information

If you upload and share an image tagged with a location, you may accidentally reveal the
information to a third party. To prevent third parties from obtaining your location information, set
[ Loc. Info. Link Set.] to [Off] before shooting images.

[447] Precautions/This product

On cleaning

Cleaning the lens, finder and flash

Wipe the lens, finder and flash with a soft cloth to remove fingerprints, dust, etc.

Cleaning the lens

Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case
of dust that sticks to the surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly
moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral pattern from the center to the outside.
Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.

Cleaning the flash

Clean the flash surface before use. The heat of the flash emission may cause dirt on the flash
surface to start smoking or burning. Wipe the flash surface with a soft cloth to remove dirt or
dust, etc.

Cleaning the camera body

Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal contact. To
clean inside the lens mount, use a commercially available blower* to blow any dust off.
* Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.

Cleaning the product surface

Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface
with a dry cloth. To prevent damage to the finish or casing:

Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol,
disposable cloths, insect repellent, sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.

Cleaning the monitor

If oil from your hand or hand cream, etc., remain on the monitor, the original coating may
become easily removable. Wipe oil or hand cream off as soon as possible.
If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the coating may be scratched.
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the
surface, and then clean the monitor using soft cloth, etc.

[448] Precautions/This product Cleaning the image sensor

Cleaning Mode

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part
that converts the light to an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image,
depending on the shooting environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the
image sensor.

1 Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.

2 MENU → (Setup) → [Cleaning Mode] → [Enter].

The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.

3 Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.

4 Detach the lens.

 5 Use the blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.

6 Attach the lens.

Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning
methods, please refer to the following URL.
http://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php

Note
Clean the image sensor quickly.

A blower is not supplied with this product. Use a commercially available blower.

Cleaning can be performed only when the battery level is (3 remaining battery icons) or more.
The use of an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor is recommended.

Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.

Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower
does not touch the image sensor.

Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.

Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.

When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too
hard, the inside of the product may be damaged.

If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.

[449] Precautions/This product

Number of recordable images

When you insert a memory card into the camera and set the ON/OFF (Power) switch to “ON,”
the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current
settings) is displayed on the screen.

Note
When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full. Replace the
memory card with another one, or delete images from the current memory card.

When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory
card.

The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card

The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory
card formatted with this camera. The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for
testing.
The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

([ Image Size]:[L: 24M])

[ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]
(Units: Images)

Quality 8 GB 16 GB 32GB 64 GB

Standard 1300 2700 5400 10500

Fine 820 1650 3300 6600

Extra fine 405 810 1600 3250

RAW & JPEG 215 435 880 1750

RAW 295 600 1200 2400

* When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the
table above. (except when [RAW] is selected)

Note
Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9999 images, “9999” will appear.

When an image shot with another product is played back on this camera, the image may not appear
in its actual size.

The numbers shown are when using a Sony memory card.

[450] Precautions/This product

Recordable movie times

The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted
with this camera. The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of
memory card used.
The recording times for when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [XAVC S HD], and
[AVCHD] are recording times when shooting with [Dual Video REC] set to [Off].
(h (hour), m (minute))

8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB

XAVC S 4K 30p 100M/25p 100M 9m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m

XAVC S 4K 30p 60M/25p 60M 15 m 30 m 1h 2h5m

XAVC S 4K 24p 100M * 9m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m

XAVC S 4K 24p 60M * 15 m 30 m 1h 2h5m

XAVC S HD 120p 100M/100p 100M 9m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m

XAVC S HD 120p 60M/100p 60M 15 m 30 m 1h 2h5m

XAVC S HD 60p 50M /50p 50M 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 35 m

XAVC S HD 30p 50M /25p 50M 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 35 m

XAVC S HD 24p 50M * 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 35 m

AVCHD 60i 24M(FX) /50i 24M(FX) 40 m 1 h 25 m 3h 6h

AVCHD 60i 17M(FH) /50i 17M(FH) 55 m 2h 4h5m 8 h 15 m

AVCHD 60p 28M(PS) /50p 28M(PS) 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m 5h5m

AVCHD 24p 24M(FX) /25p 24M(FX) 40 m 1 h 25 m 3h 6h

AVCHD 24p 17M(FH) /25p 17M(FH) 55 m 2h 4h5m 8 h 15 m

MP4 1080/60p 28M /1080/50p 28M 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 35 m 5 h 20 m

MP4 1080/30p 16M /1080/25p 16M 1h 2h 4 h 10 m 8 h 25 m

MP4 720/30p 6M /720/25p 6M 2 h 35 m 5 h 20 m 10 h 55 m 22 h

* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

 Continuous shooting is possible for approximately 29 minutes (a product specification limit).
The continuous recordable time may differ in the following situations:
When the file format is set to MP4 (28M): Approximately 20 minutes (limited by file size
of 4 GB).
When shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies: Recording will automatically stop
when the recorded file reaches approximately 29 minutes (the played back movie
reaches approximately 29 minutes). (Recording will automatically stop when the
recorded file reaches approximately 15 minutes if [ Record Setting] is set to
[60p/50p] and [ Frame Rate] is set to [30fps/25fps].)

The times for slow-motion/quick-motion movies are playback times, not recording times.

Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate),
which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-
moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable time is shorter because more memory is
required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting conditions, the
subject or the image quality/size settings.

The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.

Notes on continuous movie recording

It requires a lot of power to perform high quality movie recording or continuous shooting. Therefore, if
you continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image
sensor. In such cases, the camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is
heated to a high temperature that can affect the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of
the camera.

The following values are the continuous times from when the camera starts recording until the
camera stops recording.
Ambient temperature: 20°C (68°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 20 minutes

Ambient temperature: 30°C (86°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 20 minutes

Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 29 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 20 minutes

[Auto Pwr OFF Temp.]: [Standard]

HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M, not connected via Wi-Fi)
4K: XAVC S 4K (24p 60M, not connected via Wi-Fi)

The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record
setting for movies, Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording.
If you frequently recompose or shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the
camera will rise and the recording time available will be shorter.
 When the icon appears, the temperature of the camera is too high.

If the camera stops recording due to the temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned
off. Start recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.

If you observe the following points, the recording time will be longer.
Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.
Turn the camera off when it is not being used.

When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the
movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.

When [ File Format] is set to [MP4], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If the movie
file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop automatically.

[451] Precautions/This product

Using the AC Adaptor/battery charger abroad

You can use the battery charger (sold separately) and the AC Adaptor (supplied) in any country
or region where the power supply is within 100 V to 240 V AC and 50 Hz/60 Hz.

Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall
outlet (wall socket). Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.

Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.

[452] Precautions/This product

AVCHD format

The AVCHD format was developed for high-definition digital video cameras when recording an
HD (High-Definition) signal using high-efficiency compression coding technology. The MPEG-4
AVC/H.264 format is used to compress video data, and the Dolby Digital or Linear PCM system
is used to compress audio data.
The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is capable of compressing images at higher efficiency than that
of the conventional image compressing format.

As the AVCHD format uses compression coding technology, the picture may be unstable in
scenes where the screen, angle of view, or brightness, etc. change drastically, but this is not
 a malfunction.

[453] Precautions/This product

License

Notes on the License

This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners
of that software. Based on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications,
we have an obligation to inform you of the following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the
internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage connection between the product and
a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE
REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO
PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND
COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software

The software that is eligible for the following GNU General Public License (hereinafter referred
to as “GPL”) or GNU Lesser General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “LGPL”) are
included in the product.
This informs you that you have a right to have access to, modify, and redistribute source code
for these software programs under the conditions of the supplied GPL/LGPL.
Source code is provided on the web.
Use the following URL to download it.
http://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/
We would prefer you do not contact us about the contents of source code.

[454] Precautions/This product

Trademarks

Memory Stick and are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.

XAVC S and are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.
“AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logotype are trademarks of Panasonic
Corporation and Sony Corporation.
Mac is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
IOS is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems Inc.
iPhone and iPad are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and other
countries.
Blu-ray Disc™ and Blu-ray™ are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Eye-Fi is a trademark of Eye-Fi Inc.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other
countries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Facebook and the “f” logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Facebook, Inc.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
YouTube and the YouTube logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of
the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The N Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States
and in other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Sony Corporation is under license.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ®
marks may not be used in all cases in this manual.

[455] If you have problems

Troubleshooting

If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.

1 Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then
turn on the power.
 2 Initialize the settings.

3 Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on

this product and answers to frequently asked questions can be found at our
Customer Support Website.
http://www.sony.net/

[456] If you have problems

Warning messages

Set Area/Date/Time.

Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the
internal rechargeable backup battery.

Power insufficient.

The cleaning mode will not operate when the remaining battery charge is less than
(3). We recommend using the AC Adaptor AC-PW20 when using cleaning mode.

Unable to use memory card. Format?

The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select
[Enter] and then format the memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all
previous data in the memory card is erased. It may take some time to complete the format. If
the message still appears, change the memory card.

Memory Card Error

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.

Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.

Memory card locked.

You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the
 switch set to the LOCK position. Set the switch to the record position.

Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.

No memory card has been inserted.

To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o
Card] to [Enable]. In this case, images will not be saved.

This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Processing...

When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any
further shooting during this reduction process.

Unable to display.

Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be
displayed.
Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies
in the image database files. Repair the image database files.

Check that a lens is mounted. For an unsupported lens, set "Release w/o Lens" in the
menu to "Enable".

The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message appears when
a lens is attached, reattach the lens. If the message appears frequently, check whether the
contacts of the lens and product are clean or not.
When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or similar instrument, or using an
unsupported lens, set [Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].

Unable to print.

You tried to mark RAW images with a DPOF mark.

Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.

The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power
off and cool the product and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.

You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.

Recording is unavailable in this movie format.

Set [ File Format] to [MP4].

 The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the
product is possible.

Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer using
PlayMemories Home and recover the memory card.

Image DataBase File error

There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select [Setup] → [Recover Image
DB].

System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.

Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult
local authorized Sony service facility.

Image Database File error. Recover?

You cannot record and play back an AVCHD movie because the Image Database File is
damaged. Recover the Image Database File following the on-screen instructions.

Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.

Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.

Cannot create more folders.

A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more
folders on this camera.

Recommended pages

How to tag the location information on the images

You can record the location information on the images. The location information can be
acquired via a smartphone.

Touch Focus
You can select the subject to focus by the touch operation in the still image and movie
recording modes.

ILCE-6500 Lens compatibility information

This website provides the lens compatibility information. (Another window will open.)